BMW - M3 - V8-4.0 - E92 - Manual Part1

2008 BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) Copyright © 2011, ALLDATA 10.
40 Page 1
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 1
Vehicle: Application and ID
Vehicle Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Numbers are referred to as the VIN. BMW utilizes a VIN with a 17 character structure. The characters are grouped to
included multiple information as follows:
Vehicle Identification Number
VIN Location On Vehicle
The VIN is located on the vehicle in the following locations:

- In the left lower corner of the dashplate. This can be viewed through the windshield from outside of the car.
- "B" pillar compliance label. On the driver's side door jamb.
Additionally the VIN is stamped into the body in one of the two locations below.
- Under hood on engine compartment bulkhead.
- Under hood on passenger side shock tower.
Vehicle Production Dates

2008 BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) Copyright © 2011, ALLDATA 10.40 Page 2
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 2
The production date of the vehicle is included in the B pillar compliance label.
Production date information is required quite often when a repair procedure affects only a certain range of vehicles. The range is based on
production dates.
The date shown on the label reflects the actual month and year the vehicle was produced. It is not a model year indicator.
Vehicle Production Anti-theft Labels
Since 1987, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) requires that the VIN be marked on specific parts of the car during
manufacture for theft identification. Some models are exempt if there if the total number of vehicles imported is below a certain number.
If the vehicle does have the label it is also a reference point for the VIN.
If equipped, the label is placed on the following locations:

- Engine
- Transmission
- Hood
- Trunk lid
- Front bumper
- Rear Bumper
- Front Fenders
- Doors
- Quarter panels.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 3
Vehicle: Description and Operation
Glossary of Electrical Components All Models From E38 and MINI
00 02 05 (141)
Glossary of electrical components
All models from E38 and MINI
Introduction
This glossary contains electrical components from the circuit diagrams found in diagnosis, together with the respective abbreviated designations for
the components.
Abbreviated designations are the descriptions of the components found in the circuit diagrams. Example: "A210" for the control unit "door module,
rear passenger side".
This glossary contains approx. 2,000 abbreviated designations.
This glossary contains the following information:
- Abbreviated designation (alphanumerically sorted)
- Component
- Information: Reference to a component description in an SI Technology bulletin (SBT).
If there is not a more detailed description of the component available, a short description of the component will be given in column headed
"Information".
- KoGr.: Main group for the component
Each abbreviated designation with component is assigned to a main group.
An overview of the main groups can be found in the SI Technology bulletin (SBT) "Abbreviations".
[for more information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 00 01 03 035]
- Model series: Overview of model series in whose circuit diagrams the abbreviated designation is found.
Note: For up-to-date information, please refer to the BMW diagnosis system.
This glossary contains the abbreviated designations for the following circuit diagrams:
- Circuit diagram...DVD "BMW V 5.0", status 03/2005 (WDS: Wiring Diagram System):
This DVD contains the circuit diagrams needed for diagnosis on BMW vehicles.
- Circuit diagram...DVD "MINI V 3.0", status 03/2005 (WDS: Wiring Diagram System):
This DVD contains the circuit diagrams needed for diagnosis on MINI vehicles.
This glossary contains the abbreviated designations used in both these DVDs. Abbreviated designations that are only found in the overviews
"Component... and signal information" are not contained in this glossary.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 4
Note: Assignment of abbreviated designation to model series

For technical reasons associated with the system, some model series are listed together, as follows:
- E60 and E61

- E63 and E64
- E65 and E66
- E83 and E85
- E87 and E90
- R50, R52 and R53
For this reason, it is possible that an abbreviated designation is assigned to a model series even though the component concerned is not found in
that model series.
Alphanumerical overview of abbreviated designations
The WDS...DVD (Wiring Diagram System) alphanumerically lists the abbreviated designations from the overview "Component... and signal
information".
Abbreviated designations are alphabetically sorted in the following groups:

A - Control units, modules
B - Sensors, electric converters

[Editing not yet complete ...]
D - Diagnosis interfaces
E - Lights, electric heating equipment
F - Fuses
G - Power supply, gas generators
H - Acoustic and visual warning systems
I - Components from BMW suppliers
K - Relays
L - Coils
M - Electric motors, drives
N - Amplifiers, regulators, control units
P - Display instruments
R - Resistors, potentiometers
S - Switches, buttons
T - Ignition coils

U - Radio systems, suppressor filters

V - Semiconductors, diodes
W - Aerials, screening
X - Connectors
Connectors are not listed in this glossary.
Y - Electromechanical components
Z - Blocking circuits, suppressor filters

Subject to change.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 5
Vehicle: Service and Repair
Base of Tab Connector Housings

61 13 ... - Base of tab connector housings
Unlock hook (1) with special tool 61 1 360 and slide plug housing downwards out of base.
Butt Connector for Repairing a Plug Connection
61 13 ... - Butt connector for repairing a plug connection
Special tools required:

- 61 0 300 See: Tools and Equipment/61 0 300 Releasing Tool (Complete Kit)
- 61 9 040 See: Tools and Equipment/61 9 040 Set of Tools for Repair Kit IV
Important!
1. Identify cause of damage (e.g. sharp-edged body parts, faulty electrical loads, jammed mechanisms, corrosion caused by ingress of water,
etc.).
2. Read out fault memory
3. Eliminate cause of damage.
4. Disconnect battery negative terminal
5. Make sure that no safety-related system according to connection scheme (e.g. anti-lock braking system, active rear-axle kinematics, airbags,
etc.) are influenced. Otherwise replace faulty wiring harness or use repair cable (sourcing reference: BMW Parts Service)
6. Carry out function test and read out fault memories again
7. Eliminate new faults if applicable and clear fault memories
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 6
Note:
The repair range IV for vehicle electrical system contained the required special tools and individual parts for retrofitting and repair work with the
aid of fan connectors.
The case can no longer be ordered. Order individual parts for wiring harness repair through BMW Parts Service.
- Refer to Service Information:
SI 02 04 07 341
Special tools:
- special tool 61 9 040 See: Tools and Equipment/61 9 040 Set of Tools for Repair Kit IV
Choose repair kit.

Example: Repair kit, circular plug system D 2.5.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 7
Remove following parts:

(1) - Prepackaged end of cable with requisite wire cross-section
(2) - Crimp connector for selected wire cross-section
(3) - Shrink-fit hose
Open secondary lock on housing.

Mark damaged contact (4) with socket number of housing and press it out of housing using relevant special tool contained in special tool kit 61 0
300 See: Tools and Equipment/61 0 300 Releasing Tool (Complete Kit).
Refer to repair instructions:

Opening plug housings and removing contacts See: Opening Plug Housings and Removing Contacts of Different Plug Systems of different plug
systems
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 8
Important!
- Check maximum length of repair cable
- If more than one wire is to be repaired, the individual interfaces must be offset so that the wiring harness is not too thick at the repaired point.
Observe following procedure:
- Cut off wire with faulty contact at point which is easily accessible
- Strip insulation from end of wire at wiring harness end
- Cut preassembled wire end to length and strip insulation
Refer also to repair instruction:

Cutting to length and stripping insulation from cables See: Cutting to Length and Stripping Insulation from Cables
Crimp butt connector on preassembled wire end.

Crimping on stop parts See: Crimping Stop Parts
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 9
Push shrink-fit hose (8) onto free wire end.
Crimp unused wire end to butt connector.
Pull shrink-on sleeve over butt connector.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 10
Important!
Do not burn shrink-on sleeve.
With hot air blower, shrink the shrink-on sleeve on both sides (9) of shrink-fit hose until glue emerges uniformly all round.
Insert contact in housing.

Close secondary lock on housing.
Crimping Annular Contacts
61 13 ... - Crimping annular contacts

- 61 4 320 See: Tools and Equipment/61 4 320 Crimping Set with Pliers
Crimping annular contacts:
Special tool 61 4 320 See: Tools and Equipment/61 4 320 Crimping Set with Pliers
Handling:
Refer to Service Information:
- SI 2 04 06 2939
Crimping Micro Power Quadlock Contacts (MPQ)
61 13 ... - Crimping Micro Power Quadlock contacts (MPQ)

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 11
To crimp MPQ contacts, use pliers 61 4 321 (1) in conjunction with crimping head 61 4 325 (2) from crimping set 61 4 320 See: Tools and
Equipment/61 4 320 Crimping Set with Pliers.
Note:
Pliers (1) open automatically as far as they will go when handles are pressed together.
Open pliers (1).
Note:
Place contact (2) with utmost care in designated nest (observe cable cross-section) in crimping head (3). Make sure it is exactly positioned.
Place MPQ contact (2) in crimping head (3).
Close pliers (1) one notch.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 12
Note:
Follow procedure for cutting and stripping insulation See: Cutting to Length and Stripping Insulation from Cables from cables.
Insert stripped cable (2).
Close pliers (1) fully.
Open pliers (1) and remove cable (2).
Note:
Check contact for correct crimping See: Crimping Stop Parts.
Crimping Micro Quadlock System Contacts (MQS)

61 13 ... - Crimping Micro Quadlock System contacts (MQS)

To crimp MQS contacts, use pliers 61 4 321 (1) in conjunction with crimping head 61 4 324 (2) from crimping set 61 4 320 See: Tools and
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 13
Open pliers (1).
Fold up contact carrier (2).
Insert MQS contact (3) in contact carrier (2).
Fold back contact carrier (2).
Note:
Close pliers (1) one notch.
Insert stripped cable (2).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 14
Open pliers (1).
Open contact carrier (2) gently and carefully remove MQS contact.
Note:
Check contact for correct crimping See: Crimping Stop Parts.
Crimping Optical Fibres

61 13 ... - Crimping optical fibres

To crimp optical fibres, use pliers 61 4 321 (1) in conjunction with crimping head 61 4 323 (2) from crimping set 61 4 320 See: Tools and
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 15
Move contact guide by means of stop lever (1) into corresponding position (pin contact or jack).
Open pliers (2).
Place pin contact or jack (1) in crimping head and secure with locking lever (3).
Note:
Follow procedure for cutting and stripping insulation from optical fibres See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Cutting off, Stripping Insulation and Cutting Optical Fibres to Length.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 16
Insert stripped optical fibre (1) as far as it will go into pin contact or jack (2).
Open pliers (3) and locking lever (4).
Remove optical fibre (1).
Important!
Make sure optical fibre is correctly seated in jack.
Right (A)
End of optical fibre (1) must be flush with tip of pin contact (2).
Wrong (B)
End of optical fibre (1) is not flush with tip of pin contact (2).
Crimping Stop Parts

61 13 ... - Crimping stop parts

- 12 1 080
- 12 1 081
- 12 1 083
Spare parts for in-car electronics (housing and contacts):
SI 2 04 07 341
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 17
1. Crimping butt connectors and contact sleeves for fan connectors up to 2.5 mm2
SI 2 04 06 293
2. Crimping butt connectors and contact sleeves for fan connectors from 2.5 mm2
SI 2 02 05 194
SI 2 07 05 233
3. Crimping contact sleeves for fan connectors 4 mm2 and ignition cable contacts
Special tool kit 12 1 080 is used to fit ignition cable contacts and to crimp 4 mm2 contact sleeves for fan connectors.
- 12 1 081 (hand crimping tool)

- 12 1 083 (matrix)

Special tools for wiring harness repairs See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Tools and Equipment
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 18
Unlock special tool 12 1 081:
Squeeze grips (1) lightly and push unlocking lever (2) in direction of arrow.
Or:
Compress handles as far as they will go, tool unlocks automatically.
Insert contact sleeve 4 mm2 in nest with lock (1) as far as it will go.
Preload contact by squeezing matrix in crimping tool. Grip contact (1) firmly only, do not crimp.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 19
Note:
Insert stripped end of wire (7) in the contact. Ensure insulation and stripped wire end are correctly laid in contact.
Compress crimping tool as far as it will go.
Crimping tool unlocks automatically.
Take contact out of crimping tool.
4. Checking crimping
Check insulation crimp (8) and wire crimp (9) against following illustrations to ensure crimps are correctly located.
Note:
Illustration shows butt connectors and contact sleeves for fan connectors knocked on one side. The crimping procedure is identical here.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 20
Correct crimping:
Visible conductor end (10).
Visible insulation end (11).
Incorrect crimping:
Conductor end (10) inserted too far.
Insulation end (11) in wire crimp.
If necessary, repeat crimping with a new contact.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 21
Incorrect crimping:
Conductor end (10) not visible.
Insulation end (11) not visible.
If necessary, repeat crimping with a new contact.
Cutting OFF, Stripping Insulation and Cutting Optical Fibres to Length

61 13 ... - Cutting off, stripping insulation and cutting optical fibres to length

To cut off, strip insulation and cut optical fibres to length, use pliers 61 4 321 (1) in conjunction with crimping head 61 4 322 (2) from crimping set
61 4 320 See: Tools and Equipment/61 4 320 Crimping Set with Pliers.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 22
Cutting optical fibre
Open pliers (1).
Place optical fibre (2) in cutting device (3).
Close pliers (1) and remove optical fibre (2).
Stripping insulation from optical fibre
Open pliers (1).
Open lever (2) in direction of arrow.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 23
Slide optical fibre (1) into stripping device (2) until flush at point (3).
Close clamping lever (5) in direction of arrow.
Open pliers (4) by one tooth notch.
Open clamping lever (5) against direction of arrow again and remove optical fibre (1).
Note:
A stripping replacement blade set is available under number 61 4 327.
Cutting optical fibre to length
Important!
The cutting blade must be replaced prior to each cutting of the optical fibre.
Pull pin (1) in direction of arrow.
Fold up blade retaining link (2) in direction of arrow.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 24
Warning!
Risk of injury when changing the blade.
Remove blade (1) and replace.
Installation:
Make sure blade (1) is correctly seated on locating points (2).
Open pliers (3).
Slide optical fibre (1) into cutting device (2) until insulation of optical fibre (1) butts against clamping device.
Close pliers (3) fully and keep closed.
Remove optical fibre (1).
Cutting to Length and Stripping Insulation from Cables

61 13 ... - Cutting to length and stripping insulation from cables
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 25
For cutting cables to length and stripping insulation, refer to Service Information:
SI 8 05 06 259
Stripped length:
M Mobility System - Checking Expiry Date on Sealant Bottle

00 00 ... - M Mobility system: checking expiry date on sealant bottle
Note:
- Check expiry date on sealant bottle and if necessary replace sealant bottle
Charge separately for replacing the sealant bottle See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement
Microencapsulated Screws
00 00 ... - Microencapsulated screws
Screw locking is a means to preventing a screwed connection from being loosened by external influences.
After the screw has been coated with the adhesive, the adhesive remains inactive until it is activated by capsule breakage when the screw is inserted
and then cures at room temperature.
Installation:
- Microencapsulated screws (Loctite) must be replaced and may not be reused
- Screw connection must be completed within 20 mins. (start of curing)
- Microencapsulated screws must not be retightened
- Thread of nut must be cleaned beforehand in event of repeated use
Notes on Handling Optical Fibers

61 00 ... - Notes on handling optical fibers
Caution!
To avoid damage when handling optical fibers, comply with the following points:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 26
- The minimum permitted bending radius is 25 mm

- Do not subject optical fibers to compressive and tensile load
- Protect optical fibers against the effects of heat >=85°C (e.g. during welding work, drying work with infrared heater or hot air blower)
- Optical fibers are permitted to show only one junction point (bridge), replace optical fibers if necessary
Note:
The optical fibers are colored differently as follows:
- Green=MOST (Media Oriented Systems Transport) optical fibers
- Yellow=ISIS (Intelligent Safety and Integration System) optical fibers
- Orange=repair optical fibers
Follow instructions for processing cables and optical fibers See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Treating Cables and Fibre-optic Cables.
Notes on Handling Wiring Harnesses and Cables

61 00 ... - Notes on handling wiring harnesses and cables
In general:
To avoid damage, observe the following instructions:

- Avoid compressive and tensile loads
- Make sure cables are laid without kinks or abrasions
- Ensure non-contacting routing at sharp-edged body parts; use muckets if necessary
- Secure additionally laid cables/leads with cable ties
In addition:
Shielded cables (coaxial cables):
Important!
Shielded cables must not be repaired!
- This may lead to indifferences in noise radiation and interference immunity at contact points in the shield
- To satisfy the requirements of the type approval, it is essential to replace shielded cables completely
Fibre-optic cables:
Note:
Fibre-optic cables are coloured differently as follows:
- Green = MOST (Media Oriented Systems Transport) fibre-optic cables

- Yellow = ISIS (Integrated Service Information Server) fibre-optic cables
- Orange=repair fibre-optic cables
Important!
- Fibre-optic cables are permitted to show only one junction point (bridge), replace fibre-optic cables if necessary
- Smallest permissible bending radius is 25 mm
- Avoid effects of heat >= 85 °
Treating cables and fibre-optic cables See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Procedures/Treating Cables and
Fibre-optic Cables
FlexRay:
It is possible to repair the FlexRay. In the event of damage, the cables can be joined with conventional butt connectors See: Butt Connector for
Repairing a Plug Connection.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 27
- The cable is a twisted cable. If possible, maintain twisted cable after repair.
Airbag cables:
Repairing airbag cables See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Air Bag Harness/Service and Repair
Ribbon cables:
Repairing ribbon cables See: Repairing Ribbon Cables

Opening Plug Housings and Removing Contacts of Different Plug Systems
61 13 ... - Opening plug housings and removing contacts of different plug systems

- 61 0 400
- 61 1 100 See: Tools and Equipment/61 1 100 Releasing Kit
- 61 1 150
Important!
The contacts can be changed on ultrasonically welded plugs (1).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 28
Ultrasonically welded plugs (1) must be replaced completely.
Ultrasonic-welded connectors (1) can be identified by the welds (2) on their longitudinal side.
Note:
Special tools referred to in the repair instructions below are contained in the following special tool kits:
- Release and press-out tool 61 1 150

is replaced from 09/2005 by 61 0 300 See: Tools and Equipment/61 0 300 Releasing Tool (Complete Kit) (BMW) and 61 0 400 (MINI)
- Release and press-out tool 61 1 100 See: Tools and Equipment/61 1 100 Releasing Kit (engine)
Repair instructions for opening plug housings and removing contacts of different plug systems:
Plug system D 1.5/D 2.5:

- Circular plugs, 7-, 8-pin, System D 2.5
- Circular plugs, 13-pin, System D 2.5
- Circular plugs, 20-pin, System D 2.5
- Circular plugs, 4-, 7-, 10-, 12-, 25-pin, System D 1.5/D 2.5
- In-line plugs, 15-pin, System D 2.5
- In-line plugs, 8-, 12-pin, System D 2.5
Plug system JPT/MDK/DFK:

- In-line plugs, 2-pin, System JPT ELA
- In-line plugs, 2-pin, System MDK 3plus 2.8
- In-line plugs, 4-pin, System DFK ELA
Plug system Elo/Elo-Power:

- In-line plugs, 4-, 10-pin, System Elo
- In-line plugs, 6- to 50-pin, System Elo
- In-line plugs, 3-, 6-pin, System Elo-Power 2.8
Plug system MQS/MPQ:

- In-line plugs, 6-, 8-pin, System MQS
- In-line plugs, 2-pin, System MPQ 2.8
- Control unit plugs, 25-, 35-, 55-, 83-, 88-pin
- In-line plugs, 24-pin, Hybrid System MQS/MPQ See: Power and Ground Distribution/Multiple Junction Connector/Service and
Repair/In-line Plugs, 6- to 50-pin, System Elo
- Socket housing 42-, 43-pin, Hybrid System MQS / MPQ
- Socket housings 2x21-, 2x27-pin, Hybrid System MQS/MPQ, Elo/Elo-Power See: Power and Ground Distribution/Multiple Junction
Connector/Service and Repair/In-line Plugs, 6-, 8-pin, System MQS
- In-line plugs, 30-pin, Hybrid System MQS/MPQ
- Socket housings, 5-, 8-pin, System MQS/MPQ
- Socket housing (radio plug), Hybrid System MQS/MPQ See: Power and Ground Distribution/Multiple Junction Connector/Service and
Repair/In-line Plugs, 24-pin, Hybrid System MQS/MPQ
For plug contact systems not listed, refer to Service Information:
SI 2 05 05 217
SI 2 05 06 294
SI 2 03 08 440
SI 2 08 06 312
SI 2 02 08 439
SI 2 01 08 438
Repairing Ribbon Cables

61 13 ... - Repairing ribbon cables
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 29

- 61 1 190 See: Tools and Equipment/61 1 190 Pliers
Place ribbon cables (1) in connector housing (2) and close cover (3).
Place connector housing (1) in tool (2) 61 1 190 See: Tools and Equipment/61 1 190 Pliers.
Close tool (2).
Symbols Used and Information in Repair Instructions

00 .. ... - Symbols used and information in repair instructions
Warning!
Precautionary rules and measures which protect mechanics and other personnel against injury (including life-threatening injuries).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 30
Example:
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Only perform this work after engine has cooled down.
Important!
Specific instructions and precautionary measures which prevent damage to the vehicle or to vehicle parts. Failure to comply with the above will
invalidate any warranty claims.
The caution symbol is used in all repair instructions.
However, use of the warning word "Caution!" is not binding in every case.
The notes, instructions and precautionary measures mentioned above retain their validity.
Note:
Particular information on improved procedures for operation, testing, adjustment and upkeep.
Also indicates the end of a repair section.
Recycling:
Observe country-specific waste-disposal regulations
General information:
Refers to other instructions: such as e.g.:
Necessary preliminary tasks;
Further instructions: refer to operating instructions for balancing machine.
Replacement:
Carry out programming/coding.
Note:
Many electronic control units must be programmed/coded (e.g. when replaced).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 31
Note:
- Connect BMW diagnosis system
Important!
Read and comply with notes on protection against electrostatic damage (ESD protection).
Note:
Electronic control units and other electronic components - if handled incorrectly - can be damaged or destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Treating Cables and Fibre-Optic Cables

61 13 ... - Treating cables and fibre-optic cables

- 61 1 190 See: Tools and Equipment/61 1 190 Pliers
Note:
Special tools referred to in the repair instructions below are contained in the following special tool kits:
Subject of repair instructions

- Special tools for wiring harness repairs See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Tools and Equipment
- Cutting to length and stripping insulation from cables See: Cutting to Length and Stripping Insulation from Cables
- Crimping stop parts (contacts)
- Butt connector for repairing a plug connection See: Butt Connector for Repairing a Plug Connection
- Fan connector for retrofitting/repairs See: Power and Ground Distribution/Multiple Junction Connector/Service and Repair/Installing Fan
Type Connector for Retrofitting/repairs
- Aerial elbow plug on radio receiver
- Cutting to length and stripping insulation from optical fibers See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Cutting off, Stripping Insulation and Cutting Optical Fibres to Length
- Crimping optical fibres See: Crimping Optical Fibres
- Insulation displacement connector for repairing ribbon cables See: Repairing Ribbon Cables
Unlocking and Disconnecting Different Plug Connections

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 32
61 13 ... - Unlocking and disconnecting different plug connections
Note:
Examples of unlocking and disconnecting different plug connections.
Press lock and open clip in direction of arrow.

Disconnect plug connection.
Press lock and open clip in direction of arrow.

Disconnect plug connection.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 33
Open clip in direction of arrow and disconnect plug connection in direction of arrow.
Press lock and disconnect plug connection in direction of arrow.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 34

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 35

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 36
Engine: Application and ID
Engine Identification
Engine identification
Drive in engine numbers at marked surface with impact tool.
M47 / M47TU / M47T2
M57 / M57TU / M57T2

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 37
M67 / M67TU
N47 / N47S
M52 / M52TU
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 38
M54
M56
N40 / N45 / N45T / N43

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 39
N42 / N46 / N46T
N51 / N52 / N52K / N53 / N54
N62
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 40
N73
S54
S85 / S65
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 41
W10 / W11
W17
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 42
Engine: Application and ID
Identification By Means of Type Plate
10 00 010 - Identification by means of type plate
The type plate can be located in the engine compartment or on the B-pillar.
The type plate shows, in addition to the vehicle identification and homologation numbers and the weight specifications, some data pertaining to the
testing of general-inspection-related systems: the adjustment specifications for the headlights and the engine code and the opacity value for the
emissions test. Further general-inspection-related systems can be ascertained from the optional extra numbers.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 43
Engine: Description and Operation
11 02 05 (130)
Vacuum supply
All models
Introduction
Vacuum is principally used for the brake booster.

The vacuum in the inlet pipe depends on the varying engine load.
Diesel engines do not normally have any vacuum in the inlet pipe. Vacuum on diesel engines is provided by a pump that generates the required
vacuum.
On spark-ignition engines with Valvetronic, the throttle valve is almost always open when driving. This means that there is a lower low air pressure
in the intake manifold.
Spark-ignition engines with low vacuum in the inlet pipe also have a pump that generates additional vacuum.
Brief description of components
The following components are involved in the vacuum supply system:
- Mechanical vacuum pump

A mechanic vacuum pump is fitted to diesel engines and spark-ignition engines with Valvetronic.
The vacuum pump is mechanically driven by the engine, e.g. via the exhaust camshaft.
- Suction-jet pump
As a rule, the suction-jet pump boosts the vacuum in the inlet pipe.
- Electric vacuum pump

On some engines, an electric vacuum pump is fitted for additional vacuum supply.
In certain temporary operating situations, the vacuum in the inlet pipe may be too low. In such cases, the inlet pipe vacuum cannot be adequately
boosted by the suction-jet pump. In these situations, the electric vacuum pump ensures that sufficient vacuum is available.
Reason: After a cold start, an operating situation occurs in which there is very little inlet pipe vacuum due to the higher load. The electric
vacuum pump is actuated for a certain time. This ensures that the brake is sufficiently boosted when manoeuvring.
After a cold start, the DME will actuate the electric vacuum pump once only for max. 60 seconds.
The electric vacuum pump is actuated in the following situations:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 44
- Engine-running signal from DME
- Coolant temperature below 60 °C
The electric vacuum pump is a vane-cell pump.
- Throttle valve
The throttle valve changes the cross-sectional area of the inlet pipe. This creates an inlet pipe vacuum behind the throttle valve, especially in
overrun mode.
- DME or DDE: Digital engine electronics or digital diesel electronics
The DME or DDE actuates the components needed for system functions (e.g. solenoid valves, electric switching valves, electropneumatic
pressure converters).
System functions
The system functions of the vacuum system are described using the following examples:
- Power assist for brakes

- Actuation of exhaust flaps
- Adjustment of variable turbine geometry
- Actuation of controlled damping mounts
- Exhaust gas recirculation
- Drawing off of blow-by gases from crankcase
- Blowing out activated charcoal filter
Power assist for brakes
The brake booster amplifies the force excerpted at the brake pedal. To do this, the brake booster stores part of the vacuum generated by the engine.
The vacuum then amplifies the force generated by pressure on the brake pedal.
Actuation of exhaust flap
A controlled electropneumatic exhaust flap is fitted in the exhaust system. The exhaust flap enhances active sound-damping. The exhaust flap is
closed by vacuum.
Adjustment of variable turbine geometry
The variable turbine geometry controls the boost pressure via adjustable guide vanes. The guide vanes are actuated by vacuum.
Actuation of controlled damping mounts
In the basic setting, there is no vacuum at the control component on the mount. The bypass in the mount is closed. Hydraulic fluid flows back and
forth through a ring channel between the upper and lower chambers in the mount. The mount acts like a conventional hydraulic bearing. The mount
has hard damping.
If a vacuum is applied to the mount's control component, the bypass will open. The hydraulic fluid then flows back and forth between the chambers
through a larger cross-sectional area. The mount has softer damping.
Exhaust gas recirculation
With exhaust gas recirculation, part of the exhaust gas is take from behind the exhaust manifold. This is then fed back into the engine through the
intake air duct. The exhaust gas recirculation pipe is located at the inlet to the intake manifold.
If a vacuum is applied to the exhaust gas recirculation valve, the exhaust gas recirculation pipe will open. The level of vacuum is determined by the
opening in the exhaust gas recirculation valve.
Exhaust gases flow through a connecting pipe to the exhaust manifold and into the intake manifold.
Drawing off of blow-by gases from crankcase
The crankcase ventilation system uses vacuum to bleed the blow-by gases out of the engine block.
Blow-by gases are the small portion of the cylinder fill that passes by the piston rings and into the crankcase during compression. If the blow-by
gases are not bled from the engine block through the crankcase ventilation system, they will accumulate in the crankcase. The blow-by gases would
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 45
then apply pressure on the pistons from below. This would have a negative effect on the downward movement of the pistons in the intake stroke
and operating stroke.
Blowing out activated charcoal filter
The fuel tank vent hose is connected to an activated charcoal filter. Vapours from the fuel tank are collected in the activated charcoal filter. The
activated charcoal filter is connected to the intake manifold by a pipe. A fuel evaporation control valve is fitted in this pipe. When the fuel
evaporation control valve is opened, the vacuum in the manifold draws in fresh air. At the same time, the fresh air blows out the fuel vapours
collected in the activated charcoal filter.
Notes for service staff
Service staff should note the following points:
- General information: ---

- Diagnosis: ---
- Encoding/programming: ---
- Car and Key Memory: ---
Subject to change.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 46
Engine: Service and Repair
Installing Replacement Engine
11 00 091 - Installing replacement engine (S65)
Important!
No running-in engine oil required.
Oil grade 10W-60
Necessary preliminary tasks:

- Remove and install engine See: Removing and Installing Engine.
- Flush cooling system.
Installation Note:
If necessary, replace following components.
- Clutch
- Drive belt.
- All outer seals.
Replace all anti-fatigue bolts on flywheel and vibration damper.
- Change coolant.
- Fill engine with engine oil.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 47
Mounting Engine on Assembly Stand
Mounting engine on assembly stand (S65)

- 00 2 300
- 11 5 260 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 260 Engine Support Plate

- Remove engine.
- Remove rear water pipe.
Secure special tool 11 5 260 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 260 Engine Support Plate to crankcase with bolts (2).
Tighten bolts (2) evenly.
Note:
Bolts (1) are not required on the S65.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 48
Secure engine with special tool 11 5 260 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 260 Engine Support Plate to special tool 00 2 300.
Note:
Picture shows S85.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 49
Removing and Installing Engine
11 00 050 - Removing and installing engine (S65)

- 11 0 000
- 13 5 280
- 17 2 050

- Engine hood/bonnet in assembly position.
- Drain engine oil See: Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Service (incl. Engine Oil Filter S65).
- Remove suction filter housing See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair.
- Remove intake air manifold See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair.
- Remove underbody protection at front and rear.
- Remove transmission See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Manual Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Removing and Installing Transmission (GS6-53BZ) (Important observe repair instructions).
- Remove electric fan See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair.
- Remove radiator See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair with coolant hoses.
- Drain coolant.
- Remove expansion tank See: Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair with coolant hose.
- Draw off A/C system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Procedures/Drawing off, Evacuating and Filling A/C System (R
134a).
- Remove all lines from A/C compressor.
- Remove secondary-air pump See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Air Injection/Air Injection Pump/Service and Repair.
- Detach B+ lead See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Positive/Service and Repair/Replacing Battery Positive Lead (from
Luggage Compartment Connector to Engine Bulkhead Connector) in engine compartment.
- Detach vacuum hose See: Brakes and Traction Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and Repair from brake booster.
- Release suspension cross-brace See: Body and Frame/Frame/Cross-Member/Front Cross-Member/Service and Repair/Removing and
Installing/Replacing Left (or Right) Suspension Cross-Brace in engine compartment.
- Release grounding strap on engine support arm.
Release stabilizer (1) on front axle carrier at front.

Allow stabilizer (1) to hang loose.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 50
Remove complete steering spindle See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing
Lower Section of Steering Spindle.
Remove heat shield.
Release screws (1).
Detach steering spindle extension (2).
Tightening torque: 32 31 1AZ See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Specifications.
Release nuts (1 and 4).

Detach oil lines (2 and 3).
Recycling:
Have a cloth ready to catch a residual amount of engine oil.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 51
Secure oil lines (1) with a cable tie (2) to front panel.
Unclip heater hose (1) and set down with heating valve on engine.
Disconnect both hoses (2) from secondary-air valves.
Important!
Risk of damage to steering gear and oil sump.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 52
Disconnect fuel line (1) and lock with special tool 13 5 280.
Disconnect flushing line (2).
Unfasten engine wiring harness (1) on engine completely.

Secure engine wiring harness (1) with a cable tie (2) to engine hood/bonnet damper.
Release both clamps (1) with special tool 17 2 050.

Remove coolant hose (2).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 53
Note:
Do not release any hydraulic lines on the power steering pump.
Release power steering pump (1) on engine block.
Set down power steering pump (1) on front axle carrier.
Unscrew left and right engine mounts.

Secure special tool 11 0 000 to suspension eyes (1).
Remove engine with 2 persons.
Assemble engine.
Top up coolant See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair and vent cooling system.
Pour in engine oil.
Install replacement engine See: Installing Replacement Engine.
Correct CBS data status.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 54
Securing Engine in Installation Position
11 00 670 - Securing engine in installation position (S65)

- 00 0 200
- 00 0 202
- 00 0 204
- 00 0 208
- 11 0 020
Warning!
Risk of injury!
Observe following instructions relating to special tool:
1. Prior to each use, check the special tools for defects, modifications and operational reliability.
2. Damaged/modified special tools must not be used!
3. No changes or modifications may be made to the special tools!
4. Keep special tools dry, clean and free of grease.

- Secure engine bonnet/hood in service position See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Hood/Service and Repair/Procedures
- Remove intake air manifold See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair
Assemble cross member 00 0 200 with special tools 00 0 202, 00 0 204, 00 0 208.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 55
Important!
Avoid a change of engine position in the transverse or longitudinal direction.
Always make sure there is sufficient clearance between the engine (or its attachment parts) and the body.
Important!
Risk of damage!
Position transverse member 00 0 200 with a 2nd person helping by way of rests (1) on bolt connections of side panels.
Secure special tool 11 0 020 to spindle 00 0 202.
Attach suitable chains to special tool 11 0 020 and suspend from both engine suspension eyelets.
Warning!
Risk of injury!
Tighten down all adjusting screws and nuts on cross member 00 0 200.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 56
Unscrew nuts (1).
Raise engine approx. 10 mm with cross member.
Installation Note:
Replace self-locking nuts.
Tightening torque 22 11 2AZ See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine Mount/Specifications.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 57
Engine: Tools and Equipment
11 0 240 Coupling
11 0 240 Coupling
11 0 480 Plug Mandrel

11 0 480 Plug mandrel
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 58
11 1 310 Drift
11 1 310 Drift
11 2 030 Drift
11 2 030 Drift
Minimum set: Mechanical tools
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 59
11 2 380 Puller
11 2 380 Puller
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 60
11 4 190 1/4" Extension Piece

11 4 190 1/4" extension piece
11 5 260 Engine Support Plate

11 5 260 Engine support plate
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 61
11 5 280 Fixture
11 5 280 Fixture
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 62
11 5 461 Installation Holder

11 5 461 Installation holder
11 5 462 Installation Pliers

11 5 462 Installation pliers
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 63
11 5 463 Installation Drift

11 5 463 Installation drift
11 5 464 Removal Pliers

11 5 464 Removal pliers
11 6 360 Extractor
11 6 360 Extractor
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 64
11 9 260 Counter Support with Screw Connection

11 9 260 Counter support with screw connection
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 65
11 9 811 Holder
11 9 811 Holder
11 9 812 Screw
11 9 812 Screw
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 66
11 9 950 Fixture
11 9 950 Fixture
11 9 960 Plate
11 9 960 Plate
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 67
11 9 970 Set of Gauges

11 9 970 Set of gauges
11 9 980 Puller
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 68
11 9 980 Puller
11 9 990 Locating Fixture

11 9 990 Locating fixture
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 69
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Left Exhaust VANOS Gear

11 36 144 - Removing and installing/replacing left exhaust VANOS gear (S65)

- 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial
- 11 5 320
- 11 5 370
- 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges
Important!
Central bolts on VANOS gears have left-hand threads.
Do not release the central bolt of the adjustment units without the special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges.
Grease contact surfaces of central bolts with copper paste.

- Remove right cylinder head cover See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Sealing Cylinder
Head Cover
Release bolts (1) on cylinder bank 2.
Remove timing case cover (2).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 70
Installation Note:
Replace seal.
Important!
Both inlet and exhaust camshafts can be adjusted in the 1st cylinder firing TDC position.
Danger of mixing up both special tool bores.
The procedure for checking timing See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Testing and Inspection is different from that for adjusting.
Crank engine at central bolt.
Secure crankshaft with special tool 11 5 320 in firing TDC position of cylinder no. 1.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 71
Position of inlet camshafts, cyl. 5-8, in firing TDC position of cylinder no. 1.
Dihedron of inlet camshafts is vertical to cylinder axis, letters/numbers on camshafts point upwards (E2).
Position of exhaust camshafts, cyl. 5-8, in firing TDC position of cylinder no. 1.
Dihedron of camshafts is vertical to cylinder axis, letters/numbers on camshafts point upwards (A2).
Place special tool 11 9 971 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges on inlet camshaft.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 72
Designation (E2) on dihedron points upwards.
Place special tool 11 9 972 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges on exhaust camshaft.
Designation (A2) on dihedron points upwards.
Secure special tools 11 9 971 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges and 11 9 972 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges
with bolts (1) on cylinder head to 10 Nm.
Align gearwheels on exhaust adjustment unit with special tool 11 5 370.
Important!
Removal/installation is not possible without hexagon socket screw (2).
Hexagon socket screw (1) must not be longer than 10 mm.
Gearwheels of exhaust VANOS gear are pretensioned with a spring.
Insert M5x10 hexagon socket screw on VANOS gear.
Note:
Picture shows cylinders 1-4.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 73
Important!
CCW thread!
Release central bolts (1 and 2).
Installation Note:
Replace central bolts (1 and 2).
Installation Note:
If the hexagon socket screw is released or forgotten by mistake, the gear teeth can be readjusted with special tool 11 5 370.
Screw in knurled screw on special tool 11 5 370 until gearwheel (1) lines up with bore (see arrow) on thread.
Failure to tension the exhaust VANOS gear (1) will result in rattling noises at idle.
Note:
Picture shows (S85).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 74
Installation Note:
Check O-ring (1) on VANOS gear, replace if necessary.
Important!
Replace central bolt of adjustment unit.
Central bolt must be fully screwed once (refer to Screw fastening list See: Specifications/Variable Camshaft Control).
Important!
Rotate crankshaft at central bolt back until special tool 11 5 320 can be secured in the 10° position.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 75
Installation Note:
Coat contact face of new central bolt (1) with copper paste.
Position VANOS adjustment unit on camshaft.
Hexagon socket screw points upwards.
Insert central bolts (1 and 2) and screw with special tool 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial.
1. Joining 10 Nm
2. Joining 20 Nm
3. Settling torque 80 Nm
4. Torsion angle 200°
5. Unscrew central bolt.
6. Joining 10 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 76
Remove hexagon socket screw (1) or special tool 11 5 370.
Note:
Camshafts, cylinders 5-8, remain secured with special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges.
Release special tool 11 5 320 and continue barring engine at central bolt 10° to firing TDC position of cylinder no. 1.
Installation Note:
This minimizes timing chain and gearwheel play.
Secure crankshaft with special tool 11 5 320.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 77
Cylinders 5 to 8:
Always start screwing on the inlet side.
Secure central bolt (1) with special tool 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial.
Important!
Central bolt final tightening.
1. Joining 20 Nm
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
Remove all special tools.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 78
Check timing See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Testing and Inspection, cylinders (5 to 8).
Assemble engine.
Removing and Installing/Replacing Left Inlet VANOS Gear

11 36 142 - Removing and installing/replacing left inlet VANOS gear (S65)

- 11 5 291
- 11 5 292
- 11 5 320
- 11 5 370
Important!

- Remove left cylinder head cover See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Sealing Cylinder
Head Cover.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 79
Installation Note:
Replace seal.
Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 80
Dihedron of camshafts is vertical to cylinder axis, letters/numbers on camshafts point upwards (A2).
Place special tool 11 9 971 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges on inlet camshaft.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 81
Place special tool 11 9 972 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges on exhaust camshaft.
Important!
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 82
Important!
CCW thread!
Release central bolt (2).
Installation Note:
Replace central bolt (2).
Remove exhaust adjustment unit (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 83
Installation Note:
Note:
Installation Note:
Release chain tensioner (1).
Installation Note:
Replace sealing ring.
Tightening torque: 11 31 1AZ See: Specifications/Camshaft.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 84
Important!
CCW thread!
Installation Note:
Remove inlet adjustment unit (2).
Open plug (1).
Installation Note:
Replace seal.
Tightening torque: 11 12 4AZ See: Specifications/Cylinder Head with Cover.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 85
Secure screw connection against falling out with special tool 11 5 292.
Release screw connection at chain guide with special tool 11 5 291.
Remove inlet adjustment unit.
Lay timing chain (1) on inlet camshaft.
Important!
Do not bar engine at central bolt.
Risk of damage!to engine valves and timing chain.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 86
EIN - Inlet adjustment unit

AUS - Exhaust adjustment unit
Important!
Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 87
Installation Note:
Insert central bolts (1 and 2) without play.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 88
Note:
Secure timing chain tensioning rail.
Install chain tensioner (1).
Installation Note:

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 89
Insert central bolt (1) and screw with special tool 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial.
1. Joining 10 Nm
2. Joining 20 Nm
6. Joining 10 Nm
1. Joining 10 Nm
2. Joining 20 Nm
6. Joining 10 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 90
Installation Note:
Cylinders 5 to 8:
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 91
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
Check timing See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Testing and Inspection, cylinders (5 to 8).
Assemble engine.
Removing and Installing/Replacing Right Exhaust VANOS Gear

11 36 150 - Removing and installing/replacing right exhaust VANOS gear (S65)

- 11 5 320
- 11 5 370
Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 92

- Remove right cylinder head cover See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Sealing Left
Cylinder Head Cover
Installation Note:
Replace seal.
Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 93
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 94
Dihedron of camshafts is vertical to cylinder axis, letters/numbers (A1) on camshafts (1) point upwards.
Rotate inlet camshaft with open-end wrench (1) with minimal effort at hexagon head in direction of arrow until special tool 11 9 972 See: Tools and
Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges can be attached.
Secure special tool 11 9 972 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges with bolts (2) on cylinder head to 10 Nm.
Rotate exhaust camshaft with open-end wrench (1) with minimal effort at hexagon head in direction of arrow until special tool 11 9 971 See: Tools
and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges can be attached.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 95
Important!

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 96
Important!
CCW thread!
Release central bolts (1 and 2).
Installation Note:
Installation Note:
Note:
Installation Note:
Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 97
Important!
Installation Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 98
1. Joining 10 Nm
2. Joining 20 Nm
6. Joining 10 Nm
1. Joining 10 Nm
2. Joining 20 Nm
6. Joining 10 Nm
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 99
Installation Note:
Cylinders 5 to 8:
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 100
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
Check timing See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Testing and Inspection, bank 1, cylinders (1 to 4).
Assemble engine.
Removing and Installing/Replacing Right Inlet VANOS Gear

11 36 148 - Removing and installing/replacing right inlet VANOS gear (S65)

- 11 5 320
- 11 5 370
Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 101

Cylinder Head Cover
Installation Note:
Replace seal.
Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 102
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 103
Dihedron of camshafts is vertical to cylinder axis, letters/numbers (A1) on camshafts (1) point upwards.
Rotate exhaust camshaft with open-end wrench (1) with minimal effort at hexagon head in direction of arrow until special tool 11 9 971 See: Tools
and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges can be attached.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 104
Important!

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 105
Important!
CCW thread!
Installation Note:
Remove exhaust adjustment unit
Installation Note:
Note:
Installation Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 106
Installation Note:
Tightening torque: 11 31 1AZ See: Specifications/Camshaft
Important!
CCW thread!
Installation Note:
Remove inlet adjustment unit (2).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 107
Lay timing chain (1) on inlet camshaft (2).
EIN - Inlet adjustment unit

AUS - Exhaust adjustment unit
Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 108
Important!
Installation Note:
Position inlet adjustment unit with timing chain on inlet camshaft.
Screw in central bolt (2) hand-tight.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 109
Position exhaust adjustment unit on exhaust camshaft.
Screw in central bolt (1) hand-tight.
Install chain tensioner (1).
Tightening torque: 11 31 1AZ See: Specifications/Camshaft
Screw in central bolt (1) with special tool 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial.
1. Joining 10 Nm
2. Joining 20 Nm
6. Joining 10 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 110
1. Joining 10 Nm
2. Joining 20 Nm
6. Joining 10 Nm

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 111
Installation Note:
Cylinders 1 to 4:
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 112
Check timing See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Testing and Inspection, bank 1, cylinders (1 to 4).
Assemble engine.
Removing and Installing/Replacing Solenoid Valves on Left VANOS Adjustment Unit

11 36 715 - Removing and installing/replacing solenoid valves on left VANOS adjustment unit (S65)

Disconnect plug connections (2).

Release screw (1).
Remove solenoid valve (3), exhaust adjustment.
Installation:
Replace O-rings.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 113
Release screw (1).

Unfasten plug connection.
Remove solenoid valve (2), inlet adjustment.
Installation:
Replace O-ring.
Assemble engine.
Perform VANOS test.
Removing and Installing/Replacing Solenoid Valves on Right VANOS Adjustment Unit
11 36 720 - Removing and installing/replacing solenoid valves on right VANOS adjustment unit (S65)

- Remove intake manifold See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair (inlet solenoid valve only).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 114
Disconnect plug connection (2) on solenoid valve for exhaust adjustment.

Release screw (1).
Remove exhaust solenoid valve.
Installation:
Replace O-rings.
Disconnect plug connection on solenoid valve for inlet adjustment.

Release screws (1).
Remove inlet solenoid valve (2).
Installation:
Replace O-ring.
Assemble engine.
Perform VANOS test.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 115
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
11 00 039 - Checking compression of all cylinders (S65)

- 11 0 224
- 11 0 235
Important!
High tension - mortal danger!
Disconnect all supply leads from ignition coils (interrupt power supply to ignition coils).
Important!
Check Schrader valve on special tool 11 0 235 for correct seating (engine damage).
The throttle valves cannot be opened by opening the throttle.
The compression check is carried out exclusively by means of the idle actuators.
A compression check is only possible with the diagnosis tester.
The catalytic converter will incur damage if the fuel injectors are not switched off.

- Remove microfilter housing.
- Remove all spark plugs.
- Connect diagnosis tester.
-
-1. - Service function.
2. - Drive.
3. - Engine electronics
4. - Switch off fuel injection.
Important!
Fuel injectors are switched off.
5. - Actuate starter motor for 8 seconds.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 116
Screw special tool 11 0 235 into spark plug hole.
Check that sealing ring is in perfect condition on special tool 11 0 235.
Connection (1) for diagnosis tester or special tool 11 0 224.
Note:
Picture shows S85.
Connect special tool 11 0 224 or 25 bar pressure adapter to diagnosis tester.
Compression pressure See: Specifications/Technical Data/Engine Block, Cylinder Crankcase S65.
Now clear the fault memory.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 117
Camshaft: Testing and Inspection
11 31 072 - Checking camshaft timing (S65)

- 11 0 480 See: Tools and Equipment/11 0 480 Plug Mandrel
- 11 5 320
Important!
Bank (2), cylinders (5 - 8), is checked first.
The timing of bank (1) at cylinders (1-4) can only be checked at overlap TDC.
The lettering (E1 and A1) must point downwards.

- Remove fan cowl See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair with electronic fan.
Head Cover.
Cylinder Head Cover
- Remove all spark plugs See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair.
Important!
10 ° - 10° before TDC (top dead centre)

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 118
OT - Top dead centre
Important!
Only bank 2, cylinders (5 - 8), can be checked in cylinder no. 1 firing TDC position.
The 10° position is required only to adjust the timing.
Crank engine at central bolt until the firing TDC position appears on the vibration damper.
Engine installed: Secure vibration damper in position with special tool 11 0 480 See: Tools and Equipment/11 0 480 Plug Mandrel.
Engine removed: Secure vibration damper in position with special tool 11 5 320.
Important!
Bank 2 is checked first.
The lettering (A2 and E2) points upwards.
The positions of the cams on the exhaust camshaft point vertically upwards (see picture).
The positions of the cams on the inlet camshaft point at an angle downwards (see picture).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 119
Position special tool 11 9 972 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges on twin surface of exhaust camshaft (A2).
Position special tool 11 9 971 on twin surface of inlet camshaft (E2).
The timings are correctly set when special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges rests without a gap on the cylinder
head.
Permissible tolerance: A maximum gap of 1.0 mm is permitted on the non-contacting side of special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9
970 Set of Gauges.
Important!
Remove special tools 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges and 11 5 320.
Crank engine at central bolt 360° in direction of rotation.
The timing of bank 1 at cylinders (1-4) can only be checked at overlap TDC.
Crank engine at central bolt until the firing TDC position appears on the vibration damper.
Engine installed: Secure vibration damper in position with special tool 11 0 480 See: Tools and Equipment/11 0 480 Plug Mandrel.
Engine removed: Secure vibration damper in position with special tool 11 5 320.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 120
Important!
Position of camshaft at overlap TDC
The lettering (E1 and A1) points downwards.
The cams on cylinder no. 1 on the inlet camshaft point at an angle downwards (see picture).
The cams on cylinder no. 1 on the exhaust camshaft point at an angle downwards (see picture).
Position special tool 11 9 971 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges on twin surface of inlet camshaft (E1).
Position special tool 11 9 972 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges on twin surface of exhaust camshaft (A1).
The timings are correctly set when special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges rests without a gap on the cylinder
head.
Permissible tolerance: A maximum gap of 1.0 mm is permitted on the non-contacting side of special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9
970 Set of Gauges.
Adjust valve timing See: Adjustments.
Assemble engine in reverse sequence to its disassembly.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 121
Camshaft: Adjustments
11 31 575 - Adjusting camshaft timing (S65)

- 11 5 320
Important!
Important!
The procedure for adjusting the timing is different from that for checking the timing.
The letters/numbers on the camshafts (E1 and A1) and (E2 and A2) must point upwards.
Do not release the central bolts of the adjustment units without the special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges (risk
of damage!).
If the special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges cannot be positioned on the dihedron of the camshafts, bar the
engine at the central bolt until the special tool 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges can be secured on the cylinder head.
Installation Note:
Replace seal.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 122
Installation Note:
Replace seal.
Important!
- 10° before TDC

- TDC= top dead centre.
Before the crankshaft can be secured, the gauges 11 9 970 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges must be positioned on the camshafts.
Rotate crankshaft at central bolt.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 123
Important!
Always start timing with bank 1 (cylinders 1-4).
Position of inlet camshaft, cylinders 1-4.
Position of exhaust camshaft, cylinders 1-4.
Designation (A1) on dihedron (1) points upwards.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 124
Rotate exhaust camshaft with open-end wrench with minimal effort in direction of arrow until special tool 11 9 971 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9
970 Set of Gauges can be attached.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 125
Important!
CCW thread!
Installation Note:
Important!
Important!
Replace central bolts of adjustment units.
Central bolts must be fully screwed once (refer to Screw fastening list See: Specifications/Variable Camshaft Control).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 126
Cylinders 1 to 4:
Important!
Screw central bolt fully once.
1. Joining 20 Nm
5. Preload central bolt to 10 Nm.
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 127
Installation Note:
This minimizes timing chain play.
Cylinders 1 to 4:
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 128
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
Important!
Position of inlet camshaft, cylinders 5-8.
Installation Note:
If necessary, crank at crankshaft central bolt.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 129
Position of exhaust camshaft, cylinders 5-8.
Secure inlet camshaft with special tool 11 9 971 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges.
Secure exhaust camshaft with special tool 11 9 972 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 970 Set of Gauges.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 130
Important!
CCW thread!
Installation Note:
Important!
Important!
Replace central bolts of adjustment units.
Central bolts must be fully screwed once (refer to Screw fastening list See: Specifications/Variable Camshaft Control).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 131
Cylinders 5 to 8:
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 132
Installation Note:
This minimizes timing chain play.
Cylinders 5 to 8:
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 133
Important!
1. Joining 20 Nm
Check timing See: Testing and Inspection.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 134
Camshaft: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Left Exhaust Camshaft
11 31 036 - Removing and installing/replacing left exhaust camshaft (S65)

Head Cover.
- Remove left VANOS exhaust gear See: Variable Valve Timing Actuator/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Left
Exhaust VANOS Gear
Release screws (1).

E - Intake camshaft
A - Exhaust camshaft.
Important!
Risk of mix-up with cylinder bank 1-4.
Arrow must point in direction of travel to chain drive.
Remove bearing cap (2).
Installation:
Lubricate all bearing points with engine oil.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 135
Release screws (1) from outside inwards in 1/2 turns.

Installation:
Check plain compression rings for damage and replace if necessary.

The plain compression rings have catches at the joint.
Press plain compression rings apart upwards and downwards and remove towards front.
Important!
Plain compression rings can break easily.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 136
Insert exhaust camshaft for cylinders 5 to 8.

Designation (A 2) on dihedron points upwards.
Cams (1) on cylinder no. 5 point upwards.
Installation:
Note:
Picture shows S85.
Installation:
All bearing shells are assigned to one cylinder.
E and A from (1 to 8), e.g. E 5= inlet side on cylinder no. 5.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 137
Release screws (1) from inside outwards in 1/2 turns.

Installation:

Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 138
Removing and Installing/Replacing Left Inlet Camshaft
11 31 032 - Removing and installing or replacing left inlet camshafts (S65)

Head Cover.
- Remove left VANOS exhaust gear See: Variable Valve Timing Actuator/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Left
Exhaust VANOS Gear
- Remove left VANOS inlet gear See: Variable Valve Timing Actuator/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Left Inlet
VANOS Gear
Release screws (1).

E - Intake camshaft
Important!
Arrow (2) must point in direction of travel to chain drive.
Installation:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 139

Remove inlet camshaft for cylinders 5 to 8.
Do not place timing chain in gearcase.

Secure timing chain (1) against falling down with a cable tie (3) to one screw (2).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 140
Important!
Insert inlet camshaft for cylinders 5 to 8.

Cams on cylinder no. 6 point upwards.
Installation:
Installation:
E and A from (1 to 8), e.g. E 5= inlet side on cylinder no. 5.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 141


Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 142
Removing and Installing/Replacing Right Exhaust Camshaft
11 31 038 - Removing and installing/replacing right exhaust camshaft (S65)

Cylinder Head Cover.
- Remove right VANOS exhaust gear See: Variable Valve Timing Actuator/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Right
Exhaust VANOS Gear
Release screws (1).

E - Intake camshaft
Important!
Remove bearing caps.
Installation:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 143

Remove exhaust camshaft for cylinders 1 to 4.

Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 144
Insert exhaust camshaft for cylinders 1 to 4.

Cams on cylinder no. 4 point upwards.
Installation:
Installation:
E and A from (1 to 8), e.g. A 1= exhaust side on 1st cylinder.

Adjust valve timing.

Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 145
Removing and Installing/Replacing Right Inlet Camshaft
11 31 034 - Removing and installing/replacing right inlet camshaft (S65)

Cylinder Head Cover.
- Remove right VANOS exhaust gear See: Variable Valve Timing Actuator/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Right
Exhaust VANOS Gear
- Remove right VANOS inlet gear See: Variable Valve Timing Actuator/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Right Inlet
VANOS Gear
Release screws (1).

E - Intake camshaft
Important!
Installation:
Note:
Illustration shows cylinders 5-8.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 146

Installation:

Important!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 147
Insert inlet camshaft (1) for cylinders 1 to 4.

Cams on cylinders (1 and 3) point upwards at an angle.
Installation:
Installation:
E and A from (1 to 8), e.g. E 1= inlet side on 1st cylinder.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 148

Installation:
Adjust valve timing.

Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 149
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair
11 33 062 - Removing and installing/replacing all HVCA (hydraulic valve clearance adjustment) elements (S65)
Important!
Used HVCA elements may only be reused in the same position.
Set HVCA elements down in a clean and orderly manner.

- Remove inlet camshaft.
- Remove exhaust camshaft.
Remove HVCA element (1) in upward direction.
Installation Note:
Turning lock (2) on cylinder head.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 150
Check surface (1) of HVCA element for damage.
Installation Note:
Turning lock (2) on HVCA element.
Installation Note:
Check valve keys (1) for correct seating.
Check turning lock (2) on cylinder head for damage.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 151
Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair
11 24 571 - Replacing all connecting rod bearings (S65)

Important!
Note grinding stages on crankshaft.

- Remove all pistons See: Piston/Service and Repair.
Install new conrod bearing shells.
Installation Note:
Install one blue (1) and one red (2) bearing shell in each conrod.
Install all pistons See: Piston/Service and Repair.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 152
Note:
Check connecting rod bearing clearance.
Piston in BDC position.
Place special tool 00 2 590 (Plastigage model PG 1) on oil-free crankshaft.
Place bearing caps in position, making sure that matching numbers are paired.
Important!
Do not distort connecting rods or crankshaft.
Use the old conrod bearing bolts to check conrod clearance.
Tighten down conrod bolts with special tool 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial.
Tightening torque: 11 24 1AZ See: Specifications/Connecting Rods And Bearings.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 153
Remove conrod bearing cap and read off bearing clearance at width of pinched plastic thread on measuring scale.
Conrod bearing clearance: Refer to Technical Data See: Specifications/Technical Data/Connecting Rods and Bearings S65.
- Remove plastic thread.

- Lubricate crankshaft and bearing shells.
- Install new conrod bolts and tighten down.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 154
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair
11 21 531 - Replacing all crankshaft main bearings (S65)

- 00 2 590
- 11 4 470
Important!
1. - Repair crankcase worn St.0 or 1 / crankshaft worn St.0.
If the bearing channel is opened and closed again after engine operation, all main bearing shells must be replaced with special repair bearing shells.
Altered settling behaviour at the crankcase.
Repair bearing shells are marked with an (R) on their backs.
2. - Repair crankcase worn St.0 or 1 / crankshaft new St.0.
Repair bearing shells marked with (R) must be used.

The crankshaft comes as a set together with the bearing shells. The bearing shells for the bedplate are provided in accordance with the crankshaft
classification. For the crankcase bearing shells, the green bearing shells are always provided. The half classification is retained.
3. - Repair crankcase new St.0 or 1 / crankshaft worn St.0.
The bearing shells also designated for initial installation must be used.
The crankcase comes as a set together with the bearing shells. The bearing shells for the crankcase are provided in accordance with the crankcase
classification. For the bedplate, the green bearing shells are always provided. The half classification is retained.
4. - Repair crankcase new St.0 or 1 / crankshaft new St.0.
The bearing shells also designated for initial installation must be used.
The bearing shells provided with the crankcase must be used.
The crankcase comes as a set together with the bearing shells. The bearing shells for the crankcase are provided in accordance with the crankcase
classification. For the bedplate, the green bearing shells are always provided. The half classification is retained.

- Engine See: Service and Repair/Removing and Installing Engine removed
- Remove crankshaft See: Crankshaft/Service and Repair.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 155
Installation Note:
Bearing shell (1) with lubricant groove must be fitted in crankcase upper section.
Bearing shell (2) without lubricant groove must be fitted in crankcase lower section (bedplate).
Determine bearing play with special tool 00 2 590.
Insert crankshaft without engine oil, bolt crankcase upper and lower sections together.
Lay plastic thread (Plastigage) on crankshaft.

Fit crankcase upper section on lower section and bolt together.
Note:
Do not twist crankshaft.
Remove crankshaft.
Read off bearing play at width of flattened plastic thread and measurement scale.
Crankshaft bearing clearance radial.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 156
Crankcase upper half:
Installation Note:
Bearing shell (2) is a guide bearing.
Pay attention to guide lugs on bearing shells (see arrow).
Remove all bearing shells with lubricant groove.
Observe bearing classification.
Crankcase lower half:
Installation Note:
Bearing shell (2) is a guide bearing.
Pay attention to guide lugs on bearing shells (see arrow).
Remove all bearing shells without lubricant groove.
Observe bearing classification.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 157
Clean sealing face (1) with special tool 11 4 470.

Insert bearing shells (2) without lubricant groove.
Insert guide bearing (3) without lubricant groove on bearing seat 5.
Release screws (1).

Remove oil nozzle (2) towards top.
Bearing classification on bedplate bearing seat.

Observe colour allocation on crankshaft (1 to 5).
V= - Violet.
G = - Green.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 158
Y = - Yellow.
Bearing classification on crankcase bearing seat.

Observe colour allocation in crankcase (1 to 5).
V= - Violet.
G = - Green.
Y = - Yellow.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 159
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
11 21 500 - Replacing crankshaft (S65)

- 00 9 130 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 130 Magnet with 1/2 " Connection
- 11 4 370
- 11 4 470
- 11 9 360
Important!
Unscrew all M9 fit bolts first before releasing the crankshaft lower section.
Altered settling behaviour at the crankcase!
If the main bearing channel is opened after engine operation, all main bearing shells must be replaced with special repair bearing shells marked
with an (R).
There are two different groups of main bearing shells.

- Remove engine See: Service and Repair/Removing and Installing Engine.
- Mount engine on assembly stand See: Service and Repair/Mounting Engine on Assembly Stand.
- Remove flywheel See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flywheel/Service and Repair.
- Remove vibration damper See: Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair.
- Removing oil pan See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair.
- Remove engine oil pump See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Pump.
- Remove oil return pump See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Suction Pump.
- Remove cylinder head on left and right.
- Remove all pistons See: Piston/Service and Repair.
- Remove both timing chains See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 160
Release screws (1).
Remove holder for oil intake pipe.
Important!
Unscrew all M9 fit bolts (2) first before releasing the crankshaft lower section - risk of damage!
Bearing seat bolts (1) M11.
Important!
Release all M9 fit bolts and remove.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 161
Release fit bolts (M9) in sequence 1-10 and remove.
Release M11 bearing seat bolts in sequence 1-10.
Release screws (3).
Release screws (2).
Bolts (1) from inside outwards.
Remove bedplate upwards.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 162
Lever out crankshaft (1) with aid of a second person in direction of arrow.
Note:
Weight of crankshaft approx. 22 kg.
Picture shows S85.
Important!
If the bedplate is opened and closed again, fit special main bearing shells marked with (R) on the bearing backs.
Replace all bearing shells (2).
Replace guide bearing (3).
Installation Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 163
Remove sealing compound from joint (1).
Carefully clean threads and contact faces in upper and lower sections of crankcase.
Installation Note:
Replace nozzles (2).
Installation Note:
Replace main bearing shells.
Apply a light coating of engine oil to bearing shells.
Lay crankshaft (1) with a second person helping in direction of arrow into crankcase.
Note:
Weight of crankshaft approx. 22 kg.
Picture shows S85.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 164
Insert seal (1).
Important!
Make sure oil bore is clean.
Important!
Adhere without fail to the specified sequence of bedplate bolt connections.
Risk of damage to crankshaft.
Leaks at bedplate/crankcase.
Important!
There are no more dowel sleeves in the crankcase.
Do not use new bolts.
If new bolts are used, observe special tightening/torque specifications.
Position bedplate on crankcase.
Position lower section diagonally on bearing seats (1 and 5) using two fit bolts (1 and 2).
Join fit bolts (1 and 2) to 8 Nm.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 165
Insert fit bolts (1-8).
Join fit bolts (1-8) to 8 Nm.
Insert all M11 bolts (1).
Joint bearing seat bolts in sequence (1-10) to 30 Nm.
Mark all M11 bearing seat bolts with a coloured line (1).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 166
Secure M11 bearing seat bolts with special tools 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial and 00 9 130 See:
Tools and Equipment/00 9 130 Magnet with 1/2 " Connection.
Tighten M11 bolts to 130° angle of rotation.
Tightening torque: 11 11 1AZ See: Specifications/Engine Block.
Important!
Observe bolting sequence when using new bolts.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 167
Mark all fit bolts with a coloured line (1).
Tighten fit bolts with special tools 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial and 00 9 130 See: Tools and
Equipment/00 9 130 Magnet with 1/2 " Connection.
Secure all fit bolts (1-10) to 130° angle of rotation.
Tightening torque: 11 11 2AZ. See: Specifications/Engine Block
Insert bolts (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 168
Insert screws (2).
Insert bolts (3).
Secure bolts (1) M8x65 (22 x) with special tools 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial and 00 9 130 See:
Secure bolts (1) M8x40 (4 x) with special tools 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial and 00 9 130 See:

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 169
Secure bolts (1) M6x30 (2 x).
Drive in both nozzles with special tool 11 9 360 on left and right into crankcase.
Installation Note:
Always replace nozzles (1).
Moisten outlet holes (1) with actuator (2).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 170
Install radial shaft seal at front See: Seals and Gaskets/Front Crankshaft Seal/Service and Repair.
Install radial shaft seal at rear See: Seals and Gaskets/Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal/Service and Repair.
Installation Note:
Prepare sealing compound (1) in special tool 11 4 370.
Screw on nozzle for injecting sealing compound.
Press sealing compound nozzle in direction of arrow onto nozzle at 90°.
Slowly and evenly insert sealing compound (1) with special tool 11 4 370 in direction of arrow.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 171
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
11 23 010 - Removing and installing/replacing vibration damper (S65)

- 11 0 280
- 11 9 260 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 260 Counter Support with Screw Connection
- 11 9 263 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 260 Counter Support with Screw Connection

- Remove fan cowl with electric fan See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair.
- Remove A/C compressor drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt Tensioner/Service and Repair/Removing
and Installing/Replacing Belt Tensioner for A/C Compressor.
- Remove alternator drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair.
Release screws (1).

Remove cover (2) with belt pulley (3).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 172
Note:
Engine or transmission removed.
Secure special tool 11 9 260 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 260 Counter Support with Screw Connection to flywheel (1).
Screw in special tool 11 9 263 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 260 Counter Support with Screw Connection with bolt (2) on crankcase.
Release screws (2).

Remove vibration damper (1).
Tightening torque: 11 23 1AZ See: Specifications/Vibration Damper.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 173
Note:
Engine or transmission installed.
Attach special tool 11 0 280 to vibration damper.
Support special tool 11 0 280 on holder (1).

Release all anti-fatigue bolts (2).
Installation:
Replace stress bolts.
Support special tool 11 0 280 on holder (2).

Tighten anti-fatigue bolts (1) with special tool 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial.
Tightening torque: 11 23 1AZ See: Specifications/Vibration Damper.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 174
Piston: Service and Repair
11 25 530 - Removing and installing/replacing all pistons (S65)

- 11 4 492
- 11 5 250
- 11 5 341
- 11 5 342
- 11 5 343
- 11 5 344
- 11 9 500
- 12 2 100
Warning!
Protective goggles must be worn when working on the gudgeon pin circlip.
Important!
If pistons, connecting rods and bearing shells are reused, they must be reinstalled in the same places.
Piston and piston pin are matched to each other and can only be replaced as a pair.
Connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap are cracked.
Identification is effected by means of identical pairing letters on the connecting rod big end.
Mixing up the components will result in engine damage.
Setting of special tool 11 5 343 must not be altered.

- Remove engine See: Service and Repair/Removing and Installing Engine.
- Mount engine on assembly stand See: Service and Repair/Mounting Engine on Assembly Stand.
- Remove cylinder head on left and right.
- Remove engine oil sump See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair.
- Remove oil pump See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Pump.
- Remove oil suction pump See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Suction Pump.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 175
Do not bend oil nozzle (2) at outlets.
It is not possible to adjust the nozzles.
Oil nozzle (2) must be replaced if it is maladjusted or bent.
Remove crankshaft See: Crankshaft/Service and Repair.
Release connecting rod bolts (1) with special tool 12 2 100.
Remove connecting rod bearing cap with bearing shell.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 176
Special tool 11 5 250 without locating rod must be screwed in on the connecting rod at the bottom.
Special tool 11 5 250 with locating rod must be screwed in on the connecting rod at the top.
Rotate crankshaft (1) in direction of arrow, risk of damage to special tool 11 5 250.
Remove piston with connecting rod and special tool 11 5 250.
Depiction of function on cylinders 1-4.
Important!
Risk of damage to oil nozzle.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 177
Clamp special tool 11 5 341 in a vice.
Note:
Piston and piston pin are optimized to each other.
There are two different inside diameters on the piston pin.
Screw matching special tool 11 5 342 into special tool 11 5 341.
Secure piston (1) with connecting rod to special tool 11 5 341.
Warning!
Protective goggles must be worn for the next work step.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 178
Warning!
Protective goggles must be worn.
Lever out piston circlip with special tool 11 4 492 in direction of arrow.
If necessary, replace connecting rods.
Installation Note:
The gudgeon pin must be able to be pressed through the liner by hand with little force and must not display any significant play.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 179
Measure piston installation clearance:
Measure piston diameter with micrometer at measuring point A from bottom edge of piston and offset at 90° to the axis of the gudgeon pin.
Piston diameter at measuring point A.
Adjust micrometer to cylinder bore of engine block. Set internal calliper on micrometer to zero. Measure bottom, centre and top of cylinder bore in
direction of travel and direction of engine rotation.
Diameter of cylinder bore.
Piston installation clearance.
Total permissible wear tolerance.
If necessary, replace piston.
Important!
The connecting rods are not symmetrical.
Pay attention to elevation to direction of travel arrow.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 180
Make sure the connecting rod is in the correct installation position during preliminary installation.
On cylinders 6-10 the elevation (2) must point forwards with the arrow.
On cylinders 1-4 the elevation (1) must point rearwards against the arrow.
Valve pockets (E) point to inlet side.
Arrow direction is identical to direction of travel.
On cylinders 5-8 the elevation must point forwards with the arrow.
On cylinders 1-4 the elevation (1) must point rearwards against the arrow.
Important!
No elevations on the connecting rod big end are permitted to point to each other during installation, risk of damage to connecting rod.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 181
Installation Note:
When installed, the two lugs on connecting rods (1 and 2) must point outwards.
Secure piston (1) with connecting rod to special tool 11 5 341.
Warning!
Important!
Setting of special tool 11 5 343 must not be altered.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 182
Installation Note:
Insert piston circlip (2) so that opening points to window.
Insert piston circlip (2) into groove (1) of special tool 11 5 343.
Note:
Illustration shows N52.
Position special tool 11 5 343 with window to opening on piston (see arrow).
Position special tool 11 5 343 with window to opening on piston (see arrow).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 183
Warning!
Guide lug and cutout on special tool 11 5 343 must point to piston crown.
When special tools 11 5 343 and 11 5 344 are correctly positioned, the piston circlip must be driven in with a plastic hammer in the direction of the
arrow.
Note:
See illustration.
Installation Note:
Piston circlip (1) is correctly installed when the opening points upwards.
See illustration.
It must still be possible for piston pin to moved easily.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 184
Install all piston rings See: Piston Ring/Service and Repair.
Install all bearing shells See: Connecting Rod Bearing/Service and Repair.
Screw special tool 11 5 250 into conrod.
Always screw in special tool 11 5 250 with rod to exhaust side.
Preinstall piston with piston rings in special tool 11 9 500.
Insert piston with connecting rod in cylinder.
Important!
Risk of damage to oil spray nozzle.
Danger of piston ring failure.
Insert piston so that arrow (direction of travel pointing forwards) on piston crown points to camshaft drive.
Piston cyl. 1-4 right side, cyl. 5-8 left side.
Press in piston with special tool 11 9 500.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 185
Arrow on piston crown must point to camshaft drive (direction of travel towards front).
Important!
connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap are identified with pairing letters (1) and must not be mixed up.
Mixing them up or incorrectly fitting the conrod bearing cap on the big end will result in engine damage.
Important!
Risk of damage to oil nozzle.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 186
Rotate crankshaft (1) in direction of arrow, risk of damage to special tool 11 5 250.
Insert piston with connecting rod and special tool 11 5 250.
Moisten conrod bearing shell and crank pin slightly with engine oil.
Assemble connecting rod and crank pin.
Remove special tool 11 5 250.
Install connecting rod bearing cap with bearing shell.
Secure connecting rod bolts (1) with special tools 12 2 100 and 00 9 120 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 187
Piston Ring: Service and Repair
11 25 671 - Replacing piston rings on all pistons (S65)

- Removing all pistons See: Piston/Service and Repair
Remove piston rings with a piston-ring compressing pliers.
Note:
It might not be possible to find the identification on used piston rings.
Put aside piston rings in correct sequence and installation position.
Installation:
Piston rings marked with "R" must point to piston crown.
Groove (2), plain compression ring.
Groove (3), stepped ring.

Groove (4), bevel-edged oil control ring.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 188
Piston ring (1), bevel-edged oil control ring.

Piston ring (2), stepped ring.
Piston ring (3), plain compression ring.
Installation:
Piston rings marked with "R" must point to piston crown.
Plain compression ring is marked with (R).
Stepped ring is marked with (R1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 189
Measure axial play See: Specifications/Technical Data/Pistons with Rings and Pins S65.
Measure end clearance See: Specifications/Technical Data/Pistons with Rings and Pins S65.
Offset the contact points of the piston rings by approx. 120° to each other but do not position above the piston pin boss.
Note:
See picture S85.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 190
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 191
Cylinder Head Assembly: Testing and Inspection
11 12 729 - Checking cylinder head for watertightness (S65)

- 11 5 230
- 11 5 231
- 11 5 235
- 11 5 237
- 11 9 961
Note:
Special tool 11 5 230 can be used for both cylinder heads.

- Remove cylinder head.
- Disassemble cylinder head.
Secure special tool 11 5 231 with old cylinder head bolts.
Secure special tool 11 5 235 with special tool 11 5 237.
Note:
Picture shows S85.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 192
Secure special tool 11 9 961 with special tool 11 5 237 to 10 Nm.
Note:
Immerse cylinder head in a water bath.
Test pressure: 4.5 bar.
Check cylinder head for escaping air (cracks).
If necessary, add cleaning agent to water bath.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 193
Cylinder Head Assembly: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing Left Cylinder Head
11 12 105 - Removing and installing left cylinder head (S65)

- 11 2 250

- Remove exhaust system See: Exhaust System/Service and Repair.
- Remove left exhaust manifold.
- Remove left cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Sealing Cylinder Head Cover
- Remove left inlet camshaft See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Left Inlet
Camshaft.
- Remove left exhaust camshaft See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Left
Exhaust Camshaft.
- Partially unfasten engine wiring harness See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Replacing Wiring Harness Section for Engine and lay to one side.
- Remove throttle valves See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Throttle Body/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement from cylinders 5 to 8.
- Remove thermostat housing See: Cooling System/Thermostat/Service and Repair.
- Remove rear water pipe from cylinder head.
Release screws (1).

Remove water fitting (2).
Installation:
Replace seal.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 194
Release screws (1).
Important!
Screws (1) can fall into the chain drive. Risk of damage to the timing chain.
Remove screw (1) with a magnet from gearcase.
Release cylinder head bolt (1) with special tool 11 2 250.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 195
Release cylinder head bolts from outside to inside in sequence (10 to 1).
Note:
Replace cylinder head gasket See: Seals and Gaskets/Cylinder Head Gasket/Service and Repair.
Check cylinder head See: Testing and Inspection for water leaks.
Installation:
Fit new cylinder head screws.
Tighten down cylinder head bolts from inside to outside in sequence (1 to 10).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 196
Insert bolts (1).
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 197
Cylinder Head Assembly: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing Right Cylinder Head
11 12 106 - Removing and installing right cylinder head (S65)

- 11 2 250
- 11 5 290

- Remove exhaust system See: Exhaust System/Service and Repair.
- Remove right exhaust manifold See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair.
- Remove right cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Sealing Left Cylinder Head Cover.
- Remove right inlet camshaft See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Right
Inlet Camshaft.
- Remove right exhaust camshaft See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing
Right Exhaust Camshaft.
- Partially unfasten engine wiring harness See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Replacing Wiring Harness Section for Engine and lay to one side.
- Remove throttle valves See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Throttle Body/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement from cylinders 1 to 4.
- Remove thermostat housing See: Cooling System/Thermostat/Service and Repair.
- Remove rear water pipe from cylinder head.
Release screws (1).

Remove coolant fitting (2).
Installation:
Replace seal.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 198
Release screw (1).
Remove bearing pin (1) with special tool 11 5 290.
Release screws (1).
Important!
Screws (1) can fall into the chain drive. Risk of damage to the timing chain.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 199
Remove screw (1) with a magnet (2) from gearcase.
Release cylinder head bolt (1) with special tool 11 2 250.
Release cylinder head bolts from outside to inside in sequence (10 to 1).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 200
Note:
Replace cylinder head gasket See: Seals and Gaskets/Cylinder Head Gasket/Service and Repair.
Check cylinder head See: Testing and Inspection for water leaks.
Installation:
Fit new cylinder head screws.
Tighten down cylinder head bolts from inside to outside in sequence (1 to 10).
Insert bolts (1).
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 201
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Sealing Cylinder Head Cover
11 12 005 - Removing and installing/sealing left cylinder head cover (S65)
Important!
Magnesium material.
No steel screws/bolts may be used due to the threat of electrochemical corrosion.
A magnesium material requires aluminium screws/bolts exclusively.

Aluminium screws/bolts must be replaced each time they are released.
The end faces of aluminium screws/bolts are painted blue for the purposes of reliable identification.
Jointing torque and angle of rotation must be observed without fail (risk of damage).
Scratching of the cylinder head cover is not permitted (risk of corrosion).

- Remove rod-type ignition coils See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair.
- Disconnect plug connection at camshaft sensors.
Release bolts along line (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 202
Installation Note:
Replace seal (1).
Align gasket (1) on cylinder head cover groove.
Press in gasket (1) so that it is free from tension.

Release park plug tube (2).
Installation Note:
Check rubber on spark plug tube (2) for damage; replace spark plug tube (2) if necessary.
Apply a light coating of engine oil to spark plug tube (2) prior to installation.
Installation Note:
Clean seal residue from sealing surfaces.
Coat contact surfaces of joint (1) with Drei Bond 1209 (refer to BMW Parts Service).
Note:
Picture shows S85.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 203
Installation Note:
Check decoupling element (1) for damage and replace if necessary.
Fit cylinder head cover.

Align spark plug tubes.
Tighten down all retaining elements diagonally from inside to outside.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 204
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Sealing Left Cylinder Head Cover
11 12 006 - Removing and installing/sealing right cylinder head cover (S65)
Important!
Magnesium material.
No steel screws/bolts may be used due to the threat of electrochemical corrosion.
A magnesium material requires aluminium screws/bolts exclusively.

Aluminium screws/bolts must be replaced each time they are released.
The end faces of aluminium screws/bolts are painted blue for the purposes of reliable identification.
Jointing torque and angle of rotation must be observed without fail (risk of damage).
Scratching of the cylinder head cover is not permitted (risk of corrosion).

- Remove rod-type ignition coils See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair.
- Disconnect plug connection at camshaft sensors.
Release bolts along line (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 205
Installation Note:
Replace seal (1).
Align gasket (1) on cylinder head cover groove.
Press in gasket (1) so that it is free from tension.

Release park plug tube (1).
Installation Note:
Check rubber on spark plug tube (2) for damage; replace spark plug tube (2) if necessary.
Apply a light coating of engine oil to spark plug tube (2) prior to installation.
Installation Note:
Clean seal residue from sealing surfaces.
Coat contact surfaces of joint (1) with Drei Bond 1209 (refer to BMW Parts Service).
Note:
Picture shows S85.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 206
Installation Note:
Check decoupling element (1) for damage and replace if necessary.
Fit cylinder head cover.

Align spark plug tubes.
Tighten down all retaining elements diagonally from inside to outside.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 207
Valve Spring: Service and Repair
11 34 715 - Replacing all valve springs (S65)

- 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture
- 11 5 821
- 11 9 001
- 11 9 006
- 11 9 008
- 11 9 009
Important!
Risk of damage to cylinder head.
Use only the approved special tools.
Plastic rings on the special tools must not be damaged.
Special tools 11 5 821 and 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture must be modified to special tool 11 9 950 See: Tools and
Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture.

- Remove all HVCA elements.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 208
Note:
Place cylinder head (1) with cylinder head bolts on special tool 11 9 001.
Prepare special tool 11 9 006 with special tool 11 9 008.
Note:
Picture shows S85.
Insert aluminium profile rail (1) and align.
Secure eccentric clamping levers (2 and 3) in direction of arrow.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 209
Important!
Special tools S85 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture and 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture must be
modified to S65 11 9 950 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture.
Special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture for removing valve keys.
Special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture for installing valve keys.
Special tool 11 9 953 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture for securing valve keys.
Unscrew valve cage from special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture.
Special tool 11 9 951 (1 to 3) must be replaced.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 210
Remove all washers of special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture (S85).
Insert special tool 11 9 951 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture in correct order.
Insert washer (1) with collar facing down in valve cage (2).
Insert felt washer (2) with smooth side facing down in valve cage (1).
Insert washer (3) in valve cage (1).
Screw down special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture with inserted special tool 11 9 951 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 211
950 Fixture again.
Modify special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture with special tool 11 9 951 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture.
Important!
Use only approved special tools.
Risk of damage to the HVCA guide.
Adjust special tool 11 9 009 so that special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture can press vertically onto the valve spring.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 212
Note:
Lever (1) on special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture is tensioned with a spring.
Press down valve spring with special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture and keep pressed.
Pretension lever (1) in direction of arrow.
Release lever (1) in tensioned position.
The valve keys still installed are thus forced out and drop into the working chamber of special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280
Fixture.
Repeat the operation several times if necessary until all the valve keys are forced out.
Pull back lever on special tool 11 5 281.
Valve keys (1) can now be ejected from the working chamber (2).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 213
Note:
Lower spring plate (1).
Progressive valve spring (2).
Upper spring plate (3).
Installation Note:
Incorrect installation is not possible.
Insert lower spring plate (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 214
Important!
Use only special tool 11 9 953 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture to install the valve keys - risk of damage!
Press valve key (1) in direction of arrow into special tool 11 9 953 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture.
Secure valve keys (1).
Press valve keys into special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture with special tool 11 9 953 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9
950 Fixture.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 215
Note:
Picture shows S85.
950 Fixture.
Special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture is prepared for installation.
Installation Note:
Positioning of valve keys (1).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 216
Press down special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture with special tool 11 9 009 in direction of arrow.
Installation Note:
Both valve keys are now pressed into their initial positions.
Installation Note:
Check that valve keys (1) are in correct installation position.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 217
Valve: Service and Repair
11 34 552 - Removing and installing/replacing all valves (S65)

- 11 9 001
- 11 9 006
- 11 9 008
- 11 9 009
Important!
Risk of damage to cylinder head.
Use only the approved special tools.
Plastic rings on the special tools must not be damaged.

- Remove intake air manifold.
- Remove cylinder head cover on left and right.
- Remove cylinder head on left or right.
- Remove all spark plugs.
- If necessary, remove and install engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 218
Note:
Place cylinder head (1) on special tool 11 9 001.
Prepare special tool 11 9 006 with special tool 11 9 008.
Note:
Picture shows S85.
Insert aluminium profile rail (1) and align.
Secure eccentric clamping levers (2 and 3).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 219
Important!
Special tools S85 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture and 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture must be
modified to S65.
Special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture for removing valve keys.
Special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture for installing valve keys.
Special tool 11 9 951 (1 to 3) must be replaced.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 220
Remove all washers of special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture (S85).
Insert washer (1) with collar facing down in valve cage (2).
Insert felt washer (2) with smooth side facing down in valve cage (1).
Insert washer (3) in valve cage (1).
Screw down special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture with inserted special tool 11 9 951 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 221
950 Fixture again.
Modify special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture with special tool 11 9 951 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture.
Important!
In order to avoid damaging the HVCA guide, use only the designated special tools.
Adjust special tool 11 9 009 so that special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture can press vertically onto the valve spring.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 222
Special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture incorporates a lever (1) which is tensioned with a spring.
Press down valve spring with special tool 11 9 009 and keep pressed.
Pretension lever (1) in direction of arrow.
Release lever (1) in tensioned position.
The valve keys still installed are thus forced out and drop into the working chamber of special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280
Fixture.
Repeat the operation several times if necessary until all the valve keys are forced out.
Pull back lever on special tool 11 5 281 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture.
Valve keys (1) can now be ejected from the working chamber (2).
All the engine valves are now accessible.
Installation Note:
Set the engine valves down in neat and tidy order if they are to be reused.
Check valve seat for damage.
Important!
The cylinder head must be replaced if the valve seat is damaged.
Remachining the valve seat ring is not permitted.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 223
Note:
Picture shows S85.
Important!
Use only special tool 11 9 953 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture to install the valve keys - risk of damage!
Press valve key (1) in direction of arrow into special tool 11 9 953 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture.
Secure valve keys (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 224
Special tool 11 9 952 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture must be replaced.
Remove insert washer of special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture (S85).
Insert special tool 11 9 952 See: Tools and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture with taper facing up in valve cage (1) (see arrow).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 225
280 Fixture.
Note:
Picture shows S85.
Press valve keys in direction of arrow into special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture with special tool 11 9 953 See: Tools
and Equipment/11 9 950 Fixture.
Make sure valve keys (1) are correctly positioned.
Special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture is prepared.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 226
Press down special tool 11 5 282 See: Tools and Equipment/11 5 280 Fixture with special tool 11 9 009 in direction of arrow.
Installation Note:
Both valve keys are now pressed into their initial positions.
Installation Note:
Check that valve keys are in correct installation position.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 227
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
11 28 010 - Replacing alternator drive belt (S65)
Important!
Mark the direction of rotation of the drive belt if it is to be reused.
Replace the drive belt if it is fouled with coolant or engine oil.

- Remove drive belt for A/C system.
Release cover (1) with a screwdriver.
Press down tensioning device (1) with standard tool in direction of arrow.
Remove drive belt.
Installation Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 228
Observe direction of rotation if reusing the drive belt.
Make sure drive belt is installed in correct position.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 229
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Belt Tensioner for A/C Compressor
11 28 060 - Removing and installing/replacing belt tensioner for A/C compressor (S65)
Important!
Mixed installation of the assemblies is not permitted.
Mixed installation will result in failure of the steering assistance.

- Remove A/C compressor drive belt See: Replacing A/C Compressor Drive Belt.
Release screw (1).

Release screw for power steering high-pressure line.
Release screws (2).
Remove belt tensioner (3) with fixture.
Installation Note:
Observe the installation direction if the belt tensioner is replaced individually.
The lettering TOP must point upwards.
Different idler pulleys for c.c.w.- and c.w.-rotating power steering pumps.
Tightening torque: 11 28 1-2AZ See: Specifications/Drive Belt.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 230
Replacing A/C Compressor Drive Belt
11 28 050 - Replacing A/C compressor drive belt (S65)
Important!
Mixed installation of the assemblies is not permitted.
Mixed installation will result in failure of the steering assistance.
Different idler pulleys for c.c.w.- and c.w.-rotating power steering pumps.
Tightening torque: 11 28 1-2AZ See: Drive Belt/Specifications.

Important!
Belt routing of clockwise-rotating power steering pump (see arrow).
Press down tensioning device (1) on damper in direction of arrow and hold.
Take off ribbed V-belt.
Installation Note:
Ensure drive belt is in correct installation position.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 231
Important!
Belt routing of counterclockwise-rotating power steering pump (see arrow).
Double-sided ribbed V-belt.
Press down tensioning device (1) on damper in direction of arrow and hold.
Take off ribbed V-belt.
Installation Note:
Ensure drive belt is in correct installation position.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 232
Replacing Tensioning Device for Alternator Drive Belt
11 28 020 - Replacing tensioning device for alternator drive belt (S65)
Important!

- Remove fan cowl with electric fan.
- Remove A/C compressor drive belt.
Release screws (1).

Remove alternator drive belt.
Remove belt pulley (2) from coolant pump.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 233
Release screws (1 and 2).

Remove belt tensioner (3) with tensioning pulley.
Installation Note:
Observe the installation direction if the belt tensioner is replaced individually.
The lettering TOP must point upwards.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 234
Engine Mount: Service and Repair
Replacing Left Engine Mount
22 11 011 - Replacing left engine mount (S65)

- Secure engine in installation position See: Service and Repair/Securing Engine in Installation Position
- Lower front axle support See: Body and Frame/Frame/Subframe/Front Subframe/Service and Repair/Lowering/Raising Front Axle Carrier
(Universal Lifter)
Slacken nut (1).

Tightening torque 22 11 1AZ See: Specifications.
Installation:
Replace nuts.
Installation:
Installation position of engine mount determined by locating pin.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 235
Replacing Left Engine Support Arm
22 11 110 - Replacing left engine support arm (S65)

- Remove left exhaust manifold
Observe safety instructions See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Lifting Vehicle With a Lifting Platform on raising the vehicle.
Release screws (2).
Remove engine support arm.
Note:
Illustration similar
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 236
Replacing Right Engine Mount
22 11 001 - Replacing right engine mount (S65)

- Remove right engine support arm See: Replacing Right Engine Support Arm
Slacken nut (1).

Installation:
Replace nuts.
Installation:
Installation position of engine mount determined by locating pin.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 237
Replacing Right Engine Support Arm
22 11 100 - Replacing right engine support arm (S65)

- Secure engine in installation position See: Service and Repair/Securing Engine in Installation Position
- Release tie rod on steering gear See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Tie Rod/Service and Repair/Replacing (Removing and Installing) Left
or Right Tie Rod
Observe safety instructions See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Lifting Vehicle With a Lifting Platform on raising the vehicle.
Release screws (1).
Remove engine support arm (2).
Note:
Illustration similar
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 238
Engine Lubrication: Service and Repair
Checking Engine Oil Level
1) Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display, accompanied by the word
"OIL".
2) Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever. The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.
POSSIBLE DISPLAYS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 239
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the care is on
the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum. Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more the 1 Us quart/ 1 liter.
4 Oil level is too high.
CAUTION!! Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without delay.
5 The oil level sensor is defective. Do not add engine oil. You can continue you journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the
next oil service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
DISPLAY VIA iDrive
1. Press the MENU button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the "i" menu.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 240
3. Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service" and press controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the
controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the
controller. The oil level is displayed.
POSSIBLE MESSAGES
- "Engine oil level O.K"
- "No measurement available: Updating engine oil level measurement....." The engine oil level is measured. This can take about 3 minutes
if the care is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.
- "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart of engine oil". Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 Us quart/ 1 liter.
- "Engine oil level too high"
- "Please observe recalculated service interval for engine oil" Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly
recalculated distance remaining to the next oil service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
NOTE: Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil. If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available, you can add small
quantities of other synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use oils with API SH specification or higher.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 241
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
1) Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display, accompanied by the word
"OIL".
2) Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever. The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.
POSSIBLE DISPLAYS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 242
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the care is on
the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum. Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more the 1 Us quart/ 1 liter.
4 Oil level is too high.
5 The oil level sensor is defective. Do not add engine oil. You can continue you journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the
next oil service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
DISPLAY VIA iDrive
1. Press the MENU button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the "i" menu.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 243
3. Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service" and press controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the
controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the
controller. The oil level is displayed.
POSSIBLE MESSAGES
- "Engine oil level O.K"
- "No measurement available: Updating engine oil level measurement....." The engine oil level is measured. This can take about 3 minutes
if the care is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.
- "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart of engine oil". Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 Us quart/ 1 liter.
- "Engine oil level too high"
- "Please observe recalculated service interval for engine oil" Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly
recalculated distance remaining to the next oil service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
NOTE: Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil. If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available, you can add small
quantities of other synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use oils with API SH specification or higher.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 244
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Service (incl. Engine Oil Filter S65)
00 00 610 - Engine oil service (incl. engine oil filter S65)
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Carry out all tasks only when wearing oil-resistant, heat-resistant protective gloves incl. underarm protection, face guard and protective apron.
Important!
Perform engine oil service only when engine is at normal operating temperature (>70 °C engine oil temperature).
An exact engine oil level reading can only be obtained from an engine oil temperature >= 70 °.
Engine oil temperature can be read off in the instrument cluster.
Observe the exact engine oil filling capacity.
Overfilling the engine with engine oil will result in engine damage.
Inspection and drain-off times must be observed.
Determining the oil level via the BC button detects only changes > +/- 0.5 litre.
Recycling:
Catch and dispose of drained engine oil in a suitable container.
Observe country-specific waste-disposal regulations.
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Note:
The remaining engine oil can flow off into the oil sump only when the oil filter cap is opened.
Release oil filter cover (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 245
Tightening torque 11 42 1AZ See: Specifications/Oil Filter and Pipes.
Installation Note:
Replace oil filter element and sealing rings.
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Carry out all tasks only when wearing oil-resistant, heat-resistant protective gloves incl. underarm protection, face guard and protective apron.
Open screw plug (1) with socket and a long extension (2).
Tilt long extension (1) with socket and screw plug in direction of arrow.
Recycling:
Catch and dispose of engine oil with suitable equipment.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 246
Remove oil drain plug (1).

Drain-off time of 10 minutes must be observed without fail.
Remove oil drain plug (2).
Drain-off time of 2 minutes must be observed without fail.
Tightening torque 11 13 1AZ See: Specifications/Oil Pan.
Installation Note:
Assemble engine.
Pour in engine oil See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications.
Checking engine oil level:

- Park vehicle on a horizontal surface
- Start engine and run at idle until an engine oil temperature >= 70 °C is reached
- Pressing the BC button for more 3 seconds results in the oil level been determined again.
- Only changes > +/- 0.5 litre are detected.
- If necessary, perform odometer reset.
- Top up engine oil if necessary
- Pre-delivery inspection / engine replacement
Carry out distance travelled reset only with the BMW diagnosis system.
Observe vehicle-specific maintenance scopes.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 247
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
17 11 150 - Removing and installing/replacing engine oil cooler (S65)

- Remove front bumper trim See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Removing and
Installing Front Bumper Trim
Remove front underbody protection See: Body and Frame/Splash Guard/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Front
Underbody Protection
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Recycling:
Engine oil escapes when oil lines are released. Catch and dispose of emerging engine oil.
Slacken nut (1).

Detach oil line from engine oil cooler.
Catch and dispose of escaping oil.
Installation:
Unscrew screws (2).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 248
Slacken nut (1).

Detach oil line from engine oil cooler.
Catch and dispose of escaping oil.
Release screw (2).
Remove engine oil cooler (3).
Installation:
Add final details to vehicle.
After completing work, check engine oil level and top up if necessary.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 249
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing, Sealing/Replacing Main Flow Oil Filter
11 42 020 - Removing and installing, sealing/replacing main flow oil filter (S65)
Important!
It is essential to adhere to the exact filling capacities specified.
Recycling:
Catch and dispose of engine oil with suitable equipment.
Note national regulations.

- Remove fan cowl with electronic fan.
- Remove front underbody protection.
- Remove A/C system drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair.
- Remove water pump belt pulley See: Water Pump/Service and Repair.
- Remove coolant hoses.
- Remove vibration damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair.
- Release power steering pump See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removing
and Installing/Replacing Vane Pump for Power Steering and lay to one side (do not open pressure lines).
Release oil filter cover (1).
Installation Note:
Tightening torque: 11 42 1AZ See: Specifications/Oil Filter and Pipes.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 250
Release nuts (1 and 4).

Tightening torque: 11 42 3AZ See: Specifications/Oil Filter and Pipes
Detach lines (2 and 3).
Installation Note:
Replace O-rings.
Release screws (1).

Release screws (2).
Release screws (3).
Tightening torque: 11 42 2AZ See: Specifications/Oil Filter and Pipes
Lift out oil filter housing.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 251
Installation Note:
Replace seal (1).
Assemble engine.
Park vehicle on a horizontal surface.
Allow engine at normal operating temperature to run for 3 minutes with increased revs (min. 1000 / max. 1500 rpm).
Read off engine oil level in instrument cluster or on Control Display.
Top up engine oil if necessary.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 252
Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair
12 61 285 - Replacing engine oil level sensor (S65)
Important!
Read and comply with notes on protection against electrostatic damage (ESD protection) See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage
Warnings/Notes on ESD Protection (Electro Static Discharge).

- Switch off ignition
- Remove reinforcement plate See: Body and Frame/Frame/Structural Brace/Service and Repair
- Drain off engine oil See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Service (incl. Engine Oil Filter S65)
Unlock plug (1) and remove.

Unscrew nuts.
Tightening torque 13 62 3AZ See: Specifications/Sensors (S65).
Remove oil level sensor (2).
Installation Note:
Clean sealing face on oil sump.
Replace seal on oil level sensor.
An excessively low torque value will result in oil leaks.
An excessively high torque value will result in damage to the oil level sensor.
Top up engine oil.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 253
Oil Line: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Pressure Hose - Feed
11 42 080 - Removing and installing/replacing oil pressure hose - feed - (S65)
Important!
Recycling:
Catch and dispose of emerging engine oil with suitable equipment.

- Remove front underbody protection See: Body and Frame/Splash Guard/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Front
Underbody Protection.
Slacken nut (1).

Disconnect oil line (2).
Installation Note:
Replace O-ring.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 254
Slacken nut (1).

Unclip bracket (2).
Slacken nut (1).

Installation Note:
Replace O-ring.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 255
Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Pressure Hose - Return
11 42 085 - Removing and installing/replacing oil pressure hose - return - (S65)
Important!
Recycling:
Catch and dispose of emerging engine oil with suitable equipment.

Underbody Protection.
Slacken nut (4).

Installation Note:
Replace O-ring.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 256
Slacken nut (1).

Unclip retainer (2).
Slacken nut (1).

Installation Note:
Replace O-ring.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 257
Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Line for Engine Oil Cooler
17 11 190 - Removing and installing/replacing oil line for engine oil cooler (S65)
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Important!
Wear protective gloves and goggles.
Recycling:
Catch and dispose of drained oil in a suitable container.
Comply with the waste disposal regulations applicable in the relevant countries.

Remove underbody protection
Disconnect lines on engine oil cooler, refer to Removing engine oil cooler See: Oil Cooler/Service and Repair
Important!
When working on the oil, coolant or fuel circuit, you must protect the alternator against contamination.
Cover alternator with suitable materials.
Failure to comply with this procedure may result in an alternator malfunction.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 258
Unfasten nut.
Remove holder from oil cooler line (1).
Unclip coolant hoses from holders.

Cover ribbed V-belt with cleaning cloth or similar.
Release nuts and remove oil lines from filter housing.
Note:
After completing work, check and correct engine oil level.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 259
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
11 13 000 - Removing and installing or replacing oil sump (S65)
Recycling:
Catch and dispose of used oil in a suitable container.

- Drain engine oil.
- Secure engine in installation position See: Service and Repair/Securing Engine in Installation Position.
- Lower front axle See: Body and Frame/Frame/Subframe/Front Subframe/Service and Repair/Lowering/Raising Front Axle Carrier (Universal
Lifter).
- Remove ribbed V-belt.
- Release 4x transmission bolts.
Release screws (1).

Take off holder (2).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 260
Tightening torque. 11 13 2AZ See: Specifications/Oil Pan.
Clean sealing faces (1) with special tool 11 4 470.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 261
Installation:
Replace oil sump gasket (1).
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 262
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
12 61 280 - Replacing oil pressure switch (S65)

- Remove intake air manifold See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair
Unlock plug and remove

Remove oil pressure switch.
Installation:
Tightening torque, 13 62 2AZ See: Specifications/Sensors (S65)
Note:
Check and clear fault memory.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 263
Oil Pump: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Suction Pump
11 41 050 - Removing and installing/replacing oil suction pump (S65)

- 11 6 251
- 11 6 252
- 11 6 254
Important!
Excessively low or high play between the gearwheel pairs results in failure of the oil supply.

- Remove engine oil sump See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair.
- Remove oil pump See: Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Pump.
Release screws (1).
Tightening torque. 11 41 3AZ See: Specifications/Oil Pump with Strainer and Drive.
Remove oil pump (2).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 264
Replacing gear wheels

- Remove radial shaft seal See: Seals and Gaskets/Front Crankshaft Seal/Service and Repair at front.
Mount special tool 11 6 254 on crankcase.
Secure special tool 11 6 252 with magnetic base to special tool 11 6 254.
Note:
Special tool 11 6 254 can only be secured to the crankcase with one screw.
Important!
The oil pump chain of the oil suction pump must be removed.
The chain tensioner must not exert any tension on the oil suction pump.
Align special tool 11 6 251 with its measuring shaft (2) vertically to gearwheel (1).
Turn oil suction pump gearwheel (1) to stop.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 265
Set special tool 11 6 251 to zero.
Turn oil suction pump gearwheel (1) in direction of arrow to stop.
Backlash on oil suction pump min. 0.06 to max. 0.08 mm.
If necessary, correct oil suction pump adjustment.
Adjust oil suction pump (2) with a rubber mallet on pump housing in direction of arrow.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 266
Tightening torque 11 41 3AZ See: Specifications/Oil Pump with Strainer and Drive.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 267
Oil Pump: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Pump
11 41 000 - Removing and installing/replacing oil pump (S65)

- Remove oil pan See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair
Release screws (1).

Release screws (2).
Installation:
Replace screws.
Clean threads before installation.
Release screw (1).

Release screw (2).
Detach oil pipes from oil pump.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 268
Release screw (1).

Detach oil pipes from oil pump.
Detach oil pipes (1 and 2) from oil pump.
Installation:
Replace sealing rings.
To facilitate fitting, apply a light coating of engine oil to sealing rings.
Clean all sealing surfaces.
Slacken nut (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 269
Installation:
If reusing the sprocket wheel, check dihedron for damage and if necessary replace.
Replace microencapsulated nut (1).
Tightening torque:11 41 1AZ See: Specifications/Oil Pump with Strainer and Drive.
Release screw (1).

Release screw (2).
Fold sliding rail (3) downwards.
Remove sprocket wheel (1) from shaft.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 270
Important!
Chain tensioner piston may fall out.
Remove piston (1) in direction of arrow.
Installation:
Arrangement, chain tensioner, oil pump.
1. - Base valve
2. - Spring
3. - Piston
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 271
Release screws (1) on oil pump (2).
Installation:
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 272
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair
11 61 050 - Removing and installing air intake manifold (S65)

- 00 9 250 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 250 Torque Wrench with Flexible Extension
Important!
Do not use antiseize agents to install the air intake manifold.

- Remove air cleaner housing See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair.
Disconnect plug connection (1) on intake air temperature sensor.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 273
Unlock hose (2) for idle actuator incoming air at fastener (1) and detach in direction of arrow.
Unlock hose (2) for condensate drain line at fastener (1) and detach in direction of arrow.
Installation Note:
Each hose clamp on the decoupling element is exactly positioned.
Loosen hose clamps (1).
Secure hose clamps with special tool 00 9 250 See: Tools and Equipment/00 9 250 Torque Wrench with Flexible Extension.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 274
Tightening torque: 11 61 1AZ See: Specifications/Air Intake Manifold.
Note:
Picture shows hose clamps (1 to 3).
Release hose clamp (1) on cylinder 4.
Release hose clamp (1) on cylinders 5 to 8.
Remove intake air manifold towards top.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 275
Important!
Do not lay any tools or foreign bodies in intake area.
Risk of damage to throttle valves / engine.
Note:
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 276
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
11 14 151 - Replacing crankshaft seal (S65)

- 11 5 311
- 11 5 312
- 11 5 313
- 23 0 490 See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Manual Transmission/Transaxle/Tools and Equipment/23 0 490 Extractor

- Remove transmission See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Manual Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Removing and Installing Transmission (GS6-53BZ).
- Remove clutch.
- Remove flywheel See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flywheel/Service and Repair.
Drill a 3 mm hole into shaft seal.
Important!
Risk of damage! Remove chips/shavings immediately.
Screw in special tool 23 0 490 See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Manual Transmission/Transaxle/Tools and Equipment/23 0 490 Extractor.
Drive out radial shaft seal with impact weight.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 277
Important!
Risk of damage! Remove chips/shavings immediately.
Remove remnants of sealant from sealant outlet (1) on left and right.
Apply Drei Bond sealant 1209 to sealant outlet (1) on left and right.
Important!
Pay attention to adapter sleeve.
Special tool 11 5 311 must rest flat on crankshaft (pay attention to adapter sleeve).
Mount special tool 11 5 311 with bolts (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 278
Position support ring (1) with shaft seal (2) on special tool 11 5 311.
Push shaft seal (2) uniformly in direction of arrow over support ring onto special tool 11 5 311.
Position shaft seal (1) approx. 5 mm before crankcase.

Remove support ring (2).
Note:
Support ring (2) is no longer needed.
Press in shaft seal (1) with special tools 11 5 312 and 11 5 313.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 279
Assemble engine.
Settling time of radial shaft seal approx. 1 hour.
Correct engine oil level See: Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Service (incl. Engine Oil Filter S65) if necessary.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 280
Cylinder Head Gasket: Service and Repair
11 12 112 - Replacing both cylinder head gaskets (S65)

- 11 4 470

- Remove left cylinder head.
- Remove right cylinder head.
- Check cylinder head for leaks.
Important!
Do not open screw plugs.
The screw plug must always be replaced if it is opened by mistake.
Installation:
Make sure oil bore (1) is clean.
Note:
Picture shows S85.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 281
Check dowel sleeves (1) for damage and correct installation position.
Clean sealing faces with special tool 11 4 470.
Do not use any metal-cutting tools.
Check dowel sleeves (1) for damage and correct installation position.
Clean sealing faces with special tool 11 4 470.
Do not use any metal-cutting tools.
Remove spacer sleeves (1) in direction of arrow.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 282
Picture show cylinder bank 2. Procedure for cylinder bank 1 is identical.
Remove non-return valves (1) in direction of arrow.
Installation:
Replace spacer sleeves (1) and non-return valves (2).
Note installation direction of non-return valves (2).
Replace head gasket (1) for cylinders 1-4.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 283
Replace head gasket (1) for cylinders 5-8.
Note:
There is no oversize gasket for the S65 engine.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 284
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
11 14 005 - Replacing front crankshaft seal (S65)

- 11 2 386 See: Tools and Equipment/11 2 380 Puller
- 11 5 331
- 11 5 332
- 11 5 333
- 11 6 360 See: Tools and Equipment/11 6 360 Extractor
- 11 7 231

- Remove fan cowl See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair with electric fan.
- Remove radiator See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair.
Lay special tool 11 2 386 See: Tools and Equipment/11 2 380 Puller on crankshaft.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 285
Screw special tool 11 6 360 See: Tools and Equipment/11 6 360 Extractor to 80 Nm into radial seal.
Release radial seal from housing.
Repeat the operation several times if necessary.
Note:
Carefully saw open old radial shaft seal with an iron saw from special tool 11 6 360 See: Tools and Equipment/11 6 360 Extractor.
Remove remnants of sealant from sealant outlet (1) on left and right.
Apply Drei Bond sealant to sealant outlet (1) on left and right.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 286
Secure special tool 11 5 331 with bolts (1).
Important!
Pay attention to dowel pin.
Push special tool 11 7 231 onto special tool 11 5 331 in direction of arrow.
Installation:
Remove support ring from shaft seal.
Push shaft seal (1) uniformly by way of fitting aid 11 7 231 onto special tool 11 5 331.
Position shaft seal approx. 5 mm before crankcase.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 287
Press in shaft seal (1) with special tools 11 5 332 and 11 5 333.
Assemble engine.
Setting time of shaft seal approx. 1 hour.
Correct See: Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Service (incl. Engine Oil Filter S65) engine oil level if necessary.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 288
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
11 34 560 - Replacing all valve stem seals (S65)

- 11 1 480
- 11 5 270

- Remove all valve springs See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Spring/Service and Repair.
Remove valve stem seal with special tool 11 1 480 in direction of arrow.
Installation:
Attach the mounting sleeve (1) supplied with the new part to the valve stem.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 289
Attach valve stem seal (2) over mounting sleeve (1).
Press on valve stem seal with special tool 11 5 270 in direction of arrow as far as it will go.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 290
Timing Chain: Service and Repair
11 31 051 - Replacing both timing chains (S65)

- 11 5 290
- 11 5 292

- Remove all VANOS gears.
- Remove radial shaft seal See: Seals and Gaskets/Front Crankshaft Seal/Service and Repair at front.
- Remove oil pump See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Pump.
- Remove oil return pump See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Oil Suction Pump.
- Remove oil filter housing See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Filter/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing, Sealing/Replacing Main Flow Oil
Filter.
Release screw plug (1) on bank 1.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 291
Release screw plugs (1).

Tightening torque: 11 11 6AZ See: Specifications/Engine Block.
Release screw (2).
Remove intermediate piece (3) without gearwheel towards front.
Important!
Gearwheel can fall out.
Arrangement of gearwheel and intermediate piece:
Gearwheel (1) with dowel pin.

Intermediate piece (2).
Central bolt (3).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 292
Note:
Bearing pin (1) is only inserted.
Bearing pin (2) for two tensioning rails.
Remove bearing pin with special tool 11 5 290.
Note:
Bearing pin (1) is only inserted.
Screw in special tool 11 5 292 at bearing pin (1) and pull out.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 293
Remove bearing pin with special tool 11 5 290.

Arrangement of both timing chains:
1. - Timing chain, bank 2.

3. - Guide rail, bank 1.
5. - Tensioning rail, bank 1.
6. - Bearing pin, inserted type.
7. - Bearing pin for two tensioning and guide rails.
8. - Bearing pin, screwed type.
9. - Guide rail, bank 2.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 294
Remove timing chain, bank 2.

Remove timing chain, bank 1.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 295
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Left Hydraulic Chain Tensioner
11 31 094 - Removing and installing/replacing left hydraulic chain tensioner (S65)

- Remove left intake filter housing See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair
Installation:
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 296
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Right Hydraulic Chain Tensioner
11 31 095 - Removing and installing/replacing right hydraulic chain tensioner (S65)

- Remove expansion tank See: Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair.
- Unfasten both A/C lines See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Replacing A/C System Compressor
(S65) on A/C compressor.
Installation:
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 297
Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations
The procedure for "Checking Camshaft Timing" can be found under Camshaft, Engine See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Testing
and Inspection
The following is taken from "Adjusting camshaft timing (S65)"

See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Adjustments
Important!
The procedure for adjusting the timing is different from that for checking the timing.
Cylinders 1-4.
Rotate inlet camshaft with open-end wrench (1) with minimal effort at hexagon head in direction of arrow until special tool 11 9 972 can be
attached.
Secure special tool 11 9 972 with bolts (2) on cylinder head to 10 Nm.
Cylinders 5-8.
Secure inlet camshaft with special tool 11 9 971.

Secure exhaust camshaft with special tool 11 9 972.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 298
Water Pump: Service and Repair
11 51 000 - Removing and installing/replacing water pump (S65)

- Remove fan cowl with electronic fan See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair.
- Remove radiator See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair.
- Remove A/C compressor drive belt.
- Remove upper idler pulley See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt Tensioner/Service and Repair/Removing and
Installing/Replacing Belt Tensioner for A/C Compressor for A/C compressor.
Release screw (1).

Remove alternator drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair.
Remove belt pulley (2).
Release screws (1).

To facilitate removal of the coolant pump, it is possible to insert M6 screws on left and right (see arrows).
Installation:
Replace all sealing rings.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 299
Assemble engine.
Vent cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Procedures/Venting Cooling System and Checking for Water Leaks and check for
leaks.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 300
Cooling System: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
17 00 009 - Checking cooling system for leaks (S65)

- 00 2 030 See: Tools and Equipment/00 2 030 Universal Hydro-Lifter Basic Unit
- 17 0 101 See: Tools and Equipment/17 0 100 Tester
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Protective measures/rules of conduct:
- Wear protective goggles

- Wear protective gloves
- Observe national/country-specific regulations
Important!
Risk of slipping due to coolant on the floor.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 301
Danger of injury!
Catch and dispose of drained coolant in drip tray (1) and if necessary special tool 00 2 030 See: Tools and Equipment/00 2 030 Universal
Hydro-Lifter Basic Unit (universal hydraulic lifter).
Recycling:
Checking pressure drop in cooling system:
Open cap on coolant expansion tank. Fit special tools 17 0 101 See: Tools and Equipment/17 0 100 Tester/ 17 0 113 See: Tools and Equipment/17
0 100 Tester.
Build up gauge pressure of 2 bar, wait approx. 2 minutes.
Cooling system is impervious to leaks if pressure drop is max. 0.1 bar.
Checking pressure relief valve in cap:
Note:
Coolant residue can cause the pressure relief valve in the cap to stick, therefore repeat the check procedure on the cap 2-3 times.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 302
Screw cap (1) onto special tool 17 0 114 See: Tools and Equipment/17 0 100 Tester.
Build up pressure with special tool 17 0 101 See: Tools and Equipment/17 0 100 Tester (hand pump); observe pressure gauge to ascertain when
opening pressure is achieved.
Opening pressure of pressure relief valve See: Specifications/Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications/Radiator and Mounting Parts E90,
E92, E93 / S65.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 303
Cooling System: Procedures
Instructions for Working on Cooling System

17 00 ... - Instructions for working on cooling system
Warning!
Danger of scalding! Work on the cooling system should only be carried out when the engine has cooled down.
Important!
Wear protective gloves and goggles.
Important!
Lifetime coolant filling:
Never reuse used coolant.
When replacing and removing components which rely on the corrosion protection effect of the coolant, it is essential to change the coolant. The
cooling system must therefore be drained and refilled.
In the case of other removal work involving the draining of partial quantities of coolant, replace these quantities which have been drained with
new coolant.
Important!
Open cooling system only when it has cooled down.
Opening the cooling system while hot can result in air entering the system.
This can cause overheating with permanent damage to the engine.
Important!
When working on the oil, coolant or fuel circuit, protect the alternator against contamination.
Cover alternator with suitable materials.
Failure to comply with this procedure may result in an alternator malfunction.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 304
Important!
Do not fill coolant expansion tank over MAX level as overfilling will cause the coolant to overflow. This may give rise to traces of residual
coolant on the expansion tank or in the engine compartment and wrongly suggest possible leakages.
Recycling
Catch and dispose of drained coolant.
Note:
Tightening torque, hose clamps 17 00 1AZ See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Coolant System Components.
Instructions for disassembly/assembly of coolant hose fast-release couplings
Disassembly of fast-release coupling
Withdraw lock (1/2), disconnect hose.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 305
Installation:
Check O-rings (1).
Do not coat O-rings (1) with antiseize agent.
Assembly of fast-release coupling
Press in lock (1) before installing fast-release coupling.

Push on hose.
Fast-release coupling must clearly snap audibly into place.
Venting Cooling System and Checking for Water Leaks
17 00 039 - Venting cooling system and checking for water leaks (S65)
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Open sealing cap only after engine has cooled down.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 306
Only when refilling!
Important!
Do not fill coolant expansion tank over MAX level as overfilling will cause the coolant to overflow. This may give rise to traces of residual
coolant on the expansion tank or in the engine compartment and wrongly suggest possible leakages.
Only when refilling!
Use only recommended coolant.

Perform filling operation slowly.
Adjust coolant level to MAX.
Close coolant expansion tank.
Installation Note:
Close cap (1) until the arrow marks line up.
Important!
The following venting procedure is necessary e.g. when a part is replaced in the cooling system or when the cooling system is refilled.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 307
Only when filling!

- Perform filling operation slowly.
- Set heater to maximum temperature and turn fan down to lowest speed.
- Start engine and run at idle speed.
- Fill coolant expansion tank with 250 ml above max. (250 ml correspond to A=18 mm).
- Run engine for 15 mins.
- Cooling system vents itself.
- Coolant level must drop to marking.
- If necessary, correct coolant level.
- Close cap on expansion tank.
Note:
If necessary, check cooling system for water leaks See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 308
Cooling System: Removal and Replacement
17 11 046 - Removing and installing / replacing module carrier

- Remove coolant cooler See: Radiator/Service and Repair
- If necessary, slacken power steering cooling coil; refer to Removing power steering cooling coil
- If necessary, slacken A/C condenser and secure against damage and against falling down. Refer to Remove A/C condenser See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Condenser HVAC/Service and Repair.
Release damping pieces.
Press lock (1) and remove holder (2) downwards.

Illustration shows the left holder: The same procedure applies to the opposite side.
Installation:
Rubber mounts fall out easily, ensure correct installation position.
S65 only: Engine oil cooler loose, see Removing oil cooler.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 309
Remove module carrier (1) individually towards bottom.
When replacing module carrier:

Convert power steering cooling loop.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 310
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
64 11 262 - Removing and installing/replacing auxiliary water pump (S65)
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Follow instructions for working on cooling system See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Instructions for Working on Cooling System.
Recycling
Coolant emerges when coolant lines are detached. Have a suitable collecting container ready.
Catch and dispose of emerging coolant.

- Remove suction filter housing See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair
Disconnect plug connection (1) and remove auxiliary water pump (2) towards top.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 311
Installation Note:
Observe direction of flow.
Mark position of water hoses (1) prior to removal.
Disconnect water hoses (1) and remove auxiliary water pump (2).
Installation Note:
Install auxiliary water pump (1) in front engine bracket so that rubber mounts (2) slide exactly in associated locators (3).
After installation:
Fill and vent cooling system and check for leaks

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 312
Coolant: Service and Repair
17 00 005 - Draining and adding coolant (S65)

Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Only carry out work on the cooling system after the engine has cooled down!
Protective measures/rules of conduct:
- Wear protective goggles

- Wear protective gloves
- Observe national/country-specific regulations
Important!
Danger of injury!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 313
Catch and dispose of drained coolant in drip tray (1) and if necessary special tool 00 2 030 See: Tools and Equipment/00 2 030 Universal
Hydro-Lifter Basic Unit (universal hydraulic lifter).
Recycling:

- Follow instructions for working on cooling system See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Instructions for Working on Cooling System
- Use only recommended coolant
Draining coolant:
Open cap (1) on coolant expansion tank (2).
If fitted, release drain plug (1) on coolant radiator.
On coolant radiators which do not have a drain plug, remove coolant hose.
Drain, catch and dispose of coolant from radiator.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 314
Installation Note:
Adding coolant:
Vent cooling system and check for leaks See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Venting Cooling System and Checking for Water Leaks.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 315
Coolant Level Sensor: Service and Repair
61 31 382 - Replacing coolant level switch
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Carry out work only after engine has cooled down.
Important!
Do not damage connected water hoses.

- If necessary, release screws for coolant expansion tank and raise coolant expansion tank slightly
Note:
Operation is shown by way of example on the E85. There may be differences in detail in the case of other vehicle models.
Disconnect plug connection (1).
Turn coolant level switch (2) in direction of arrow and feed downwards out of coolant expansion tank (3).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 316
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
17 11 100 - Removing and installing/replacing coolant expansion tank (S65)

- Drain coolant See: Coolant/Service and Repair from radiator
Unlock coolant hoses and detach.

Release screws.
Raise expansion tank slightly until plugs on coolant level switch and lower coolant hose are accessible.
Unlock plugs on coolant level switch and lower coolant hose and disconnect.
Remove coolant expansion tank.
Installation:
Insert locating pin in rubber grommet.
Vent cooling system See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Venting Cooling System and Checking for Water Leaks and check for leaks.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 317
Radiator Cooling Fan: Service and Repair
17 11 035 - Removing and installing/replacing fan cowl with electric fan (S65)
Important!
Risk of short circuits!
When removing fan cowl, protect plug and housing against moisture; dry with compressed air if necessary.

- Read out fault memory of DDE control unit; if necessary, work through test schedules
- Remove intake duct
- Unclip coolant lines from fan cowl.
Unlock connector and remove.
Important!
Risk of short circuits!
When removing fan cowl, protect plug and housing against moisture; dry with compressed air if necessary.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 318
Release retaining screw (1) for fan cowl.

Unclip cable.
Unclip vent lines.
Turn lower hose holder through 90°.
Remove fan cowl (2) towards top.
Installation Note:
When installing fan cowl, make sure guide tabs are correctly positioned.
Clear DME fault memory.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 319
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
13 62 531 - Replacing coolant temperature sensor (S65)

- Read out fault memory of DME control unit; if necessary, work through test schedules
- Remove intake air manifold See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair

Remove temperature sensor.
Installation:
Tightening torque, 13 62 1AZ See: Engine/Specifications/Sensors (S65)
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 320
Heater Core: Service and Repair
64 11 208 - Replacing heater core
Important!
Determine manufacturer of installed heater (Denso or Behr) before ordering spare parts!
Remove trim panel for pedal assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Panel for Pedals.

- Remove heater/air conditioner
Release screws (1).

Slide rubber grommet (1) with foam seal forward slightly.
Carefully feed pipe holder (3) with pipes (4) past rubber grommet (2).
Installation Note:
If necessary, replace rubber grommet (1) and/or foam seal.
Make sure rubber grommet (1) is correctly seated on pipe holder (3).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 321
If necessary, remove coolant hose (2).

Release screws (3) and remove cover.
Note:
Diesel version only:
Unfasten plug connection (1) and disconnect.
Withdraw electric auxiliary heater (4) in direction of arrow.
Remove heater (5) from heater/air conditioner (6).
Release screws (1) and slide screw clamps (2) forwards slightly.
Remove pipes (3) from heater core (4).
Installation Note:
Coat sealing rings with antiseize agent.
Make sure sealing rings are correctly seated.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 322
Important!
Inflow connection (3) may only be positioned at the bottom.
When installing, make sure that the return-flow connection (2) (larger opening) marked with a black dot (1) is positioned at the top.
Inflow connection (3) accordingly may only be positioned at the bottom.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 323
Radiator: Service and Repair
17 11 000 - Removing and installing radiator (N51, S65)
Warning!
Danger of scalding!
Important!
Wear protective goggles and gloves.

- Follow instructions for working See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Instructions for Working on Cooling System on cooling system
- Remove intake duct
- Remove intake filter housing See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair
- Remove fan cowl See: Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair
- Draining coolant See: Coolant/Service and Repair
- Unlock coolant hoses and detach
If fitted:
- Remove heat exchanger for automatic transmission fluid
Automatic only:
Release bolt and detach hose (1).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 324
Release screws.
Carefully feed out radiator (1) towards top and remove.
Note:
Illustration shows N54.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 325
Thermostat: Service and Repair
11 53 000 - Removing and installing/replacing coolant thermostat (S65)

- Remove intake air manifold See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair.
- Drain coolant See: Coolant/Service and Repair.
Release unlocking element (1).

Detach vent line (2).
Disconnect fuel line See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair from fuel rail.
Release screws (2).
Unlock wiring harness of fuel injectors (1).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 326
Clip injection pipe (1) out of holder (2).

Lay injection pipe, cylinders 5 to 8, to one side.
Disconnect plug connection (1) on coolant temperature sensor.

Disconnect plug connection (2) on solenoid valve.
Unlock coolant hoses and detach.

Release screws (1).
Installation:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 327
Remove thermostat housing with thermostat forwards in direction of arrow.

Clean sealing surfaces.
Remove thermostat (1).

Check rubber section (2) for damage.
Remove connecting pipes (2).
Installation:
Replace all O-rings on connecting pipes.
Assemble engine.
Vent cooling system See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Venting Cooling System and Checking for Water Leaks and check for leaks.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 328
Exhaust System: Service and Repair
18 00 018 - Removing and installing complete exhaust system (S65)

- 31 2 220 See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Tools and Equipment/31 2 220 Support Plate
Warning!
Danger of burning and other injuries!
Removal of the exhaust system must be carried out with the assistance of a second person.
Note:
Weight of exhaust system is approx. 40 kg.

- E93 only: Remove tension strut
Support exhaust system with special tools 31 2 220 See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Tools and Equipment/31 2 220 Support Plate and 00
2 030 See: Tools and Equipment/00 2 030 Universal Hydro-Lifter Basic Unit.
Disconnect all oxygen sensors.
The description refers only to one side of the two-flow exhaust system. The procedure is identical for both sides.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 329
Release screws.
Installation Note:
Tightening torque 18 40 2AZ See: Specifications/Exhaust Manifold.
Release screws.
Release screws (1).
Remove reinforcement plate.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 330
Installation Note:
Tightening torque 51 61 7AZ See: Body and Frame/Frame/Structural Brace/Specifications.
Release nuts.
Tightening torque 18 40 3AZ. See: Specifications/Exhaust Manifold
Unscrew nuts.
Remove grounding strap.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 331
Release screws (1) on rear apron.
Unscrew nuts (2).
Lower exhaust system.
Installation Note:
Check exhaust system for leaks.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 332
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Catalytic Exhaust-Gas Converter
18 32 050 - Removing and installing/replacing catalytic exhaust-gas converter (S65)
Warning!
Scalding hazard!
Only perform these tasks after exhaust system has cooled down.

- Remove underbody protection
- Remove cable holder on side of transmission for control sensor/monitor sensor
- Remove exhaust system See: Service and Repair.
Release screws on clamps.

Disconnect catalytic converter from rear muffler.
Assemble vehicle and check exhaust system for leaks.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 333
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Catalytic Exhaust-Gas Converter with Centre Muffler
18 32 040 - Removing and installing/replacing catalytic exhaust-gas converter with centre muffler (S65)

Warning!
Scalding hazard!
Support rear silencer with special tool 31 2 220 See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Tools and Equipment/31 2 220 Support Plate.
Note:
Description of one side of two-flow exhaust system.
The procedure is identical on both sides.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 334
Release screws.
Release screws.
Release screws (1).
Remove reinforcement plate.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 335
Installation Note:
Tightening torque 51 61 7AZ See: Body and Frame/Frame/Structural Brace/Specifications.
Remove catalytic exhaust-gas converter with centre muffler.
Remove catalytic exhaust-gas converter with a second person helping.
Note:

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 336
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair
18 40 020 - Removing and installing/replacing right exhaust manifold (S65)
Warning!
Scalding hazard!
Only perform these tasks on an engine that has cooled down.

- Remove complete exhaust system See: Service and Repair
- Secure engine in installation position with special tool See: Engine/Service and Repair/Securing Engine in Installation Position
- Lower front axle support See: Body and Frame/Frame/Subframe/Front Subframe/Service and Repair/Lowering/Raising Front Axle Carrier
(Universal Lifter)
- Remove right engine support arm See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair/Replacing
Right Engine Support Arm
Note:
For purposes of clarity, the following work steps are shown on the engine after it has been removed.
Release screws.
Remove heat shield.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 337
Unscrew nuts.
Remove exhaust manifold (1).
Installation Note:
Replace nuts.
Tightens nuts on each flange.
Replace seals, paying attention to installation location of seals.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 338
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair
18 10 ... - Removing and installing/replacing trim for exhaust pipe
Release screw.
Detach trim (1).
Tightening torque 18 00 1AZ See: Specifications/Rear Muffler.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 339
Muffler: Service and Repair
18 12 030 - Removing and installing/replacing rear muffler (S65)

Warning!
Scalding hazard!
Support rear silencer with special tool 31 2 220 See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Tools and Equipment/31 2 220 Support Plate.
Note:
Description of one side of two-flow exhaust system.
The procedure is identical on both sides.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 340
Unfasten nut.
Unscrew nuts.
Remove grounding straps.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 341
Release screws (1) on rear apron.
Unscrew nuts (2).
Remove rear muffler with a second person helping.
Note:

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 342
Powertrain Management: Description and Operation
Motor Electronics (DME Digital Engine Electronics MSS65)
Brake Light Switch

Brake Light Switch
The brake light switch is used to detect when the brake pedal is operated.
Function
The brake light switch is mounted on the brake pedal. It is in the form of a Hall-effect sensor. The switch is supplied with power by the light
module as of terminal R ON.
The brake light switch is evaluated by the following control modules:

- Digital Motor Electronics (DME)
- Light module (LM) for activating the brake lights
- Car Access System (CAS) for enabling engine starting and forwarding the brake signals to the K-CAN BUS
- Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) for deactivating cruise control when the brake is applied
The brake light switch supplies two signals:

- S_BLS ... Brake light switch
- S_BLTS ... Brake light test switch
These signals are received and evaluated by the individual control modules independently of each other:
This ensures that the "Brake applied" signal is transmitted even in the event of a fault in the signal path.
In contrast to the other control modules, the two signals of the brake light switch are simultaneously evaluated in the DME. This direct comparison
of the two signals makes it possible to establish definitely whether the brake pedal is being operated. Furthermore, a malfunction of the brake light
switch can also be diagnosed. In addition, the function is still possible if one of the signals fails.
The two signals of the brake light switch behave with respect to each other in accordance with the following table:
The following signal levels can be measured at the two outputs of the brake light switch:
Diagnosis
The signals of the brake light switch are constantly checked by the DME for plausibility. In the event of a fault, the relevant details are stored in the
DME fault memory. Cruise control is also deactivated at the same time. It can only be reactivated when the fault can no longer be diagnosed.
Accelerator Pedal Module
Accelerator Pedal Module
The accelerator pedal module detects the driver's instructions for altering the speed of the vehicle.
Design and function

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 343
The position of the accelerator is detected by a special sensor and analyzed by the digital engine module (DME). The accelerator module is fitted
with two independent Hall-effect sensors. Those sensors each transmit a voltage signal corresponding to the current pedal position. For safety
reasons, two sensors are used. On that basis and taking other engine operating parameters into account, the required position for the throttle valve is
calculated. The throttle valve is then operated by the throttle valve positioner.
The accelerator module receives a constant voltage of 5 V from the DME. For safety reasons, each sensor has a separate power supply.
The two Hall-effect sensors transmit a signal that is proportional to the pedal position. The signal from sensor 2 is always exactly half the voltage of
the signal from sensor 1. The two signal voltages are permanently monitored by the DME.
Diagnosis
The maximum engine output is limited in the event of a fault. The vehicle has a delayed response to abrupt movements of the accelerator pedal. If
two faults occur simultaneously, the engine speed is limited to max. 1500 rpm. The relevant fault codes are stored on the DME identifying the
faulty Hall-effect sensor.
The following faults can be detected:

- Hall-effect sensor short circuit
- Signal above Hall-effect sensor voltage range
- Signal below Hall-effect sensor voltage range
- Implausible difference between signal levels of the two Hall-effect sensors
- Power supply failure or voltage too low
Fuel Tank Vent Valve
Set oscilloscope display crankshaft sensor
Signal at idling speed:
Signal at starting speed:

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 344
Diagnostic Module For Tank Leakage (Dmtl)

Diagnostic Module, Tank Leakage - DMTL
The tank leak diagnostic module (DMTL) serves to identify leaks in the fuel system. Monitoring the fuel system for leaks is required by law within
the framework of Onboard Diagnosis.
The tank leakage diagnostic module consists of the following components:

- Electric vane pump: For establishing the required overpressure in the tank for tank leak diagnosis
- Changeover valve: For setting the various operating states
- Module housing with integrated reference leak of 0.5 mm
- Heater: For heating the vane pump to eliminate condensation
The function of the tank leakage diagnostic module is controlled by the Digital Motor Electronics (DME).
Function of tank leak diagnosis
The fuel system is regularly checked for leaks after the engine is switched off. In this case, the following processes take place in the DME run-on
phase:
- Starting situation: During normal engine operation, the changeover valve in the diagnostic module is in the so-called regenerating position.
The fuel vapors are stored in the carbon canister and fed to the engine as a function of activation of the tank venting valve (see also Tank
ventilation).
- Checking start conditions: The necessary start conditions are checked after the engine is switched off:
- Engine OFF
- Battery voltage between 11.5 V and 14.5 V
- No entries in the DME fault memory for the tank leakage diagnostic module and the tank venting system
- Tank fill level greater than 10% and less than 90%
- Ambient temperature between -7 degree C and 35 degree C
In the event of a positive result, tank leak diagnosis is started with the reference leak measurement
- Reference leak measurement: The tank venting valve is always closed after the engine is switched off. The changeover valve of the
diagnostic module remains in the regenerating position. The electric vane pump pumps fresh air from the surrounding area over a reference
leak of 0.5 mm in diameter. The pump current required for this is stored as the reference value. This is followed by the actual tank leakage
check.
- Tank leakage check: The tank venting valve remains closed. The changeover valve of the diagnostic module is switched into the diagnosis
position. The vane pump pumps fresh air from the surrounding area into the tank, during which the internal tank pressure increases slowly.
At the start of the tank leakage check, the internal tank pressure corresponds to the ambient pressure. The pump current is therefore low. It
increases as the internal tank pressure rises. The pump current is evaluated by the DME.
- Evaluation of pump current: The DME evaluates the increase in the pump current in a defined time interval. If the pump current exceeds the
reference current within this time interval, the fuel system is evaluated as OK. Tank leakage diagnosis is terminated. If on the other hand the
pump current fails to reach the reference current, the fuel system is evaluated as not OK. Diagnosis permits distinctions between:
- Major leak/missing tank cap
- Minor leak
- Minimal leak
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 345
The relevant fault is entered in the DME fault memory. Tank leak diagnosis is then terminated.
- End of tank leak diagnosis: The changeover valve is returned to the regenerating position. The DME run-on phase is available for further
functions.
This function can also be initiated actively by means of the DIS Tester. In this case, the processes take place as described above.
Diagnosis of module components
The components of the tank leakage diagnostic module are diagnosed by the DME. If a relevant fault occurs during engine operation, a
corresponding fault is stored in the DME fault memory. The following faults can be diagnosed:
- Activation of solenoid valve
- Activation of pump motor
- Module fault
- Activation of heater for tank leakage diagnostic module
The diagnostic program offers the option of initiating the system test by means of the DIS Tester. In addition, the system components can be
checked individually.
Oil Supply
Oil Condition Sensor
The oil condition sensor increases the function range of the thermal oil level sensor. The oil condition sensor measures the following variables:
- Engine oil temperature
- Oil level
- Engine oil quality
The engine management system evaluates these measurements. With the oil condition sensor, the electrical properties of the engine oil are also
determined. These properties alter when the engine oil shows signs of degradation and ageing.

The following components are described:
Oil condition sensor

The oil condition sensor is attached to the oil pan and is accessible from below. On all new engine types, there is no longer a dipstick. These
engines have an electronic oil level check.
Oil Pan Bottom View

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 346
Index
The oil condition sensor is connected via a bit-serial data interface to the engine management system. Power is supplied via terminal 87.
Circuit
Index
System functions
The following system functions are described for the oil condition sensor:
- Measuring method
- Electronic oil level control
Measuring method
The oil condition sensor consists of 2 cylindrical condensers. The condensers are mounted above one another. 2 metal tubes are inserted one
into the other to serve as electrodes. The engine oil is used as a dielectric medium between the electrodes.
Note!
Explanation of the terms 'dielectric' and 'permittivity'.
A dielectric is defined as a non-conductive material in an electrical field. The electrical field is split by an insulator.
The permittivity (Latin: permittere = permit, let through) is also referred to as the dielectric conductance. The permittivity specifies the
degree to which materials allow electrical fields to pass. The factor indicates by how much the voltage at a capacitor drops when a
dielectric, non-conducting material is arranged between the capacitor plates.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 347
Oil Pan Cross Section
Index
The temperature sensor is seated on the housing of the oil condition sensor. The housing of the oil condition sensor contains an electronic
evaluation unit. The electronic evaluation unit has self-diagnosis. A fault in the oil condition sensor is entered in the fault memory of the
engine management system.
The oil condition sensor sends its measured values to the engine management system:
- Engine oil temperature
- Oil level
- Engine oil quality
The electrical material properties of the engine oil change as the engine oil wears and ages. The changed electrical properties of the engine oil
(dielectrics) cause the capacity of the capacitor to change.
The electronic evaluation unit converts the measured capacity into a digital signal. The digital sensor signal is sent to the engine management
system. The engine management system uses the signal for internal calculations (e.g. condensate in the engine oil).
Electronic oil checking

The oil level is measured for the electronic oil level check. The 2nd capacitor in the upper part of the oil condition sensor registers the oil
level with the engine running. The capacitor is at the same level as the oil level in the oil sump. As the oil level changes, the capacitance of
the capacitor changes. The electronic evaluation unit creates a digital signal from this. The engine management system uses this to calculate
the engine oil level. The electronic oil level check is displayed on the Central Information Display (CID) as well as in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a CID, the oil level is only displayed in the instrument cluster.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 348
Instrument Cluster
Index
Display options in the instrument cluster
Central Information Display

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 349
Index
Display options at the Central Information Display
Notes for Service department

General information
Note: condensate in the engine oil.
Condensate that forms in the crankcase due to short distance driving can influence the permittivity. If the water is mixed in the engine oil,
it also collects around the oil condition sensor.
If there is too much water in the crankcase:
In individual cases there can be an incorrect display of the oil level or a warning requesting that the oil be topped up.
This "false oil level warning" can be treated by means of a fault profile selection on the BMW diagnosis system, whereby the permittivity
of the oil is also evaluated. However, there is no direct display of the permittivity. The permittivity depends on, among other things, the
viscosity or age of the oil. This means that an appraisal of the quality is not ensured in every case.
Note: Please comply with instructions in Owner's Manual.
The display messages available for the electronic oil level check can be found in the Owner's Manual.
Diagnosis instructions
Note: after replacement or programming of the engine control module.
Initially, no oil level is saved. "Oil level under min" is then displayed. The correct oil level is only displayed after approx. 2 minutes of
engine operation (engine at operating temperature, engine speed greater than 0, vehicle stationary).
Note: failure of the display.
If the instrument cluster or the Central Information Display fails:

The oil level can also be read out using the BMW diagnosis system.
No liability can be accepted for printing or other faults. Subject to changes of a technical nature
Electronic Vehicle Immobilization
Electronic vehicle immobilization
The electronic immobilizer (EWS) is both an anti-theft device and start release.
The 4th generation EWS is an enhancement of the EWS used to date. This enhancement uses a new and modern encryption method.
Each vehicle is assigned a 128-bit secret code. This secret code is stored in a BMW database. This means that the secret code is only known to
BMW.
The secret code is programmed and locked in the following control module:
CAS control module (not E83)
The EWS is integrated in the CAS control module.
- EWS control module (only E83)
The E83 has an EWS control module, but no CAS control module.
- DME/DDE control module
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 350
When the secret code is locked in the control modules, it can no longer be deleted or changed. This means that each control module is assigned to a
certain vehicle. The control modules mutually identify themselves with the secret code and the same algorithm.
In the 4th generation EWS, there is no direct line (EWS data line) between DME/DDE and CAS (not E83).
The CAN data line (PT-CAN and K-CAN) and the K bus (also called CAS bus) are used for data interchange of the EWS signal. The K bus is used
when an EWS signal cannot be sent on the CAN data line.
> E83: As before, data interchange between the EWS control module and DME/DDE takes place across the direct EWS data line.
Deployment of the EWS (4th generation):
The following components are described for the EWS:
Remote control with integrated transponder chip

A transponder chip is integrated in every remote control; this can both transmit and receive. The data transfer takes place in the same way as a
transformer between the loop aerial in the insertion slot or ignition lock (only E83) and the transponder chip. The remote control sends data to the
EWS or CAS control module and receives data from it.
The authorization of the remote control for each vehicle is also coded in the transponder chip.
The EWS or CAS control module can manage a maximum of 10 remote controls that match the control module, i.e. a maximum of 6 remote
controls can be obtained as replacements.
The EWS or CAS control module can identify the individual remote controls. This means it is possible to disable or enable individual remote
controls. If faults occur during communication between the EWS or CAS control module and the individual remote controls, these are stored in the
fault memory - separately for each individual remote control.
Loop antenna
The insertion slot for the remote control or around the ignition lock (only E83) is a ring antenna (coil) to query the transponder chip. The
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 351
transponder chip and EWS or CAS control module communicate via the ring antenna.
Electric Steering Lock

On vehicles with an electrical steering interlock, this is supplied with electrical current after authentication by the CAS. Only now can the steering
be unlocked or locked. An engine start is only permitted when the electrical steering interlock has been unlocked and secured.
EWS data line

> E83
The EWS control module and DME/DDE mutually authenticate one another across the EWS data line.
Selector-lever position öPö or öNö with automatic transmission

On vehicles with automatic transmission, start release is only given by the EWS or CAS control module of the selector lever is in position öPö or
öNö.
The following control modules are involved in the electronic immobilizer (EWS):
CAS: Car Access System

> not E83
The CAS control module is the master control module for the EWS. The EWS is integrated in the CAS.
The secret code is stored in the CAS control module and is secure against manipulation.
The CAS control module is attached to the bus on the K-CAN (body CAN) and the K bus (body bus).
The CAS control module is the interface to the insertion slot for the remote control.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 352
EWS control module

> only E83
The EWS control module is attached to the K bus (body bus).

The EWS control module is the interface to the ignition lock.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 353
DME/DDE: Digital Engine Electronics /Digital Diesel Electronics

The DME / DDE control module only enables the engine start if a correct enable signal is received from the EWS or CAS control module. The
secret code is stored in the DME/DDE and is secure against manipulation.
JBE: Junction box electronics

> E70, E81, E82, E87, E88, E90, E91, E92, E93, R55, R56
The JBE is the data interface between the PT-CAN (Powertrain CAN) and K-CAN (body CAN).
KGM: Body Gateway Module

> E60, E61, E63, E64
The KGM is the data interface between the PT-CAN (Powertrain-CAN) and K-CAN (body CAN).
KOMBI: Instrument cluster

> E83
The instrument cluster is the data interface between the PT-CAN (Powertrain-CAN) and K bus (body bus).
EGS: Electronic transmission control

> only E70
The Electronic Transmission Control (EGS) is integrated in the 4th generation EWS as another immobilizer. The EGS control module is attached to
the K bus.
The transmission function is only enabled when the CAS control module and EGS control module authenticate one another.
CA: Comfort Access

With optional extra 322 öComfort Accessö: An identification sensor is required instead of the usual remote control. The identification sensor also
performs the usual functions of the remote control.
The control module for Comfort Access (CA control module) controls the vehicle interior aerials and the vehicle exterior aerials. An ID transmitter
scan is carried out. At the same time, the FBD receiver is activated for any ID transmitters which may respond (FBD: remove control service).
The CAS control module is the master control module for all functions
run by the Comfort Access optional extra.
System functions
The following system functions are described for the EWS:
Control of the electrical steering interlock
Start enable
Control of the electrical steering interlock

During the unlocking procedure, an authentication procedure is run between the Car Access System (CAS) and the electrical steering interlock. The
electrical steering interlock may only commence unlocking after a positive result in the authentication procedure. For safety reasons, the electrical
steering interlock is not supplied with current while the vehicle is being driven. The electrical steering interlock is only supplied with voltage for
the unlocking procedure or locking procedure.
Start enable
If the identification data is correct, the CAS control module activates the starter motor via a relay in the control module. At the same time, the CAS
control module sends the DME control module a coded release signal for the engine start. The DME control module only enables the engine start if
a correct enable signal is received from the CAS control module.
After inserting the ignition key in the ignition lock or the remote control in the insertion slot, the following sequence begins:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 354
The transponder in the ignition key or in the remote control is supplied with energy via the ring antenna and sends the key data to the EWS or CAS
control module.
The EWS or CAS control module checks the correctness of the key data and only then enables activation of the starter by the DME/DDE.
The DME/DDE uses a random number and the secret code to calculate a request. The DME/DDE sends this request via the CAN data line
(PT-CAN and K-CAN) and the K bus (also called CAS bus) to the CAS control module.
The CAS control module uses the request and the secret code to calculate the response. The response is sent by the CAS via the CAN data line
(PT-CAN and K-CAN) and the K bus (also called CAS bus) to the DME/DDE.
The DME/DDE itself also calculates the response that the CAS control module expects. The DME/DDE then checks the response received from the
CAS control module to ensure it matches the response it has calculated itself.
If the responses match, the engine start is enabled.
Identical changing codes are stored in the control modules; their value changes after every starting operation. The changing code is formed from a
random number and the secret code.

General information
Calibration of engine management system with electronic immobilizer
With the introduction of the new EWS (4th generation), the calibration between the engine control module and electronic immobilizer is no longer
required.
6-cylinder petrol engines

The elimination of the calibration takes effect with the engine control modules MSV80 and MSD80 as of 06/2006.
Diesel engines
Elimination of the calibration takes effect with the engine control modules DDE7 as of 03/2007.
M-GmbH engines
The elimination of the calibration takes effect with engine control module MSS60 as of 06/2007.
From this point onwards, certain control modules can only be replaced with control modules specifically ordered for each vehicle.
Note! Procedure in the event of a defective control module!
If the CAS, EWS (only E83) or DME / DDE is defective, a certain procedure must be followed.
The required control module must be ordered exactly for the vehicle. This requires the vehicle data (vehicle identification number).
An EWS calibration is not necessary after renewing the control module.
> E70
When replacing the Electronic Transmission Control, a calibration is necessary. During calibration, the CAS control module transfers an individual
code to the EGS control module. This individual code is required for the authentication procedure to enable the transmission function.
Important
A trial replacement of the control modules with secret code is not possible!
Spare key
Spare keys can only be obtained through a BMW dealer with BMW Parts Service. There, one of the 6 spare keys is programmed to match the
vehicle. This key is not a copy of the lost key, but rather a new key.
A total of no more than 6 spare keys that match the fitted EWS control module can be manufactured and delivered.
If a new key is inserted for the first time in the ignition lock, there is a noticeable start delay of 1 to 2 seconds. Thereafter, the starting operation
must be without any delay.
Lost keys must be blocked via the diagnosis. Refer to öSpecial features of the diagnosis programö.
CAUTION!
Each request for a key is documented so that inquiries from insurance companies and authorities can be followed up.
Reprocurement after loss of all remote controls or ignition keys

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 355
If all remote controls or ignition keys are lost, a new EWS or CAS control module is required.
Service functions
Blocking / releasing remote controls or ignition keys
It is possible to electronically block or release individual remote controls or ignition keys via the diagnosis (service functions).
Important
Electronically blocked means that both the starter and the engine control module are not enabled for a start. It must be borne in mind that an
electronically blocked ignition key still fits mechanically, i.e. all flaps and door can still be opened.
Display of the remote controls or ignition keys used in this vehicle

Here, it is displayed whether each individual ignition key (remote control) managed by the EWS or CAS control module has already been detected
at least once by the EWS or CAS control module, i.e. it is possible even in the case of older vehicles to recognize how many remote controls or
ignition keys have already been used in this vehicle.
No liability can be accepted for printing or other faults. Subject to changes of a technical nature
Ews Calibration
MSV80/MSD80: no calibration to CAS
Calibration of engine management system with electronic immobilizer
With the introduction of a new generation of electronic immobilizers, the calibration between the engine control module and electronic immobilizer
is no longer required.
The elimination of the calibration for 6-cylinder petrol engines takes effect with the DMEs MSV80 and MSD80 as of June 2006.
In the case of diesel engines, the change will be introduced with DDE7 as of March 2007.
Engines from M-GmbH no longer have to adjusted to the DME MSS60 as of June 2007.
From this point onwards, DME / DDE or CAS control modules can only be replaced with control modules specifically ordered for each vehicle.
BIT-Serial Data Interface (BSD)

Bit-Serial Data Interface (BSD)
The bit-serial data interface is a single-wire data bus with a data transfer rate of 1.2 kBd.
The following components are connected across the bit-serial data interface with the DME/DDE control module:
- Alternator
- Intelligent battery sensor (depending on model series)
- Combustion preheating control module (for diesel engines)
- Electrical coolant pump (depending on variant)
- Oil condition sensor (depending on variant)
Only DDE control module: Each component connected across the BSD is connected to its own pin on the DDE control module. However, these
pins are interconnected in the control module.
Function
The following data is interchanged between the DME/DDE and the connected components:
- Function commands from the DME/DDE to the components
- Identification data of the components to the DME/DDE
- Operating values of the components and their functions to the DME/DDE
- Fault messages of the components to the DME/DDE
Diagnosis
The DME/DDE monitors the communication across the bit-serial data interface to the connected components. This means that wire faults are also
detected.
The connected components have their own diagnosis functionality and monitor the following:
- The executed functions are monitored for faults (e.g. defective preheating circuit for the combustion preheating control module)
- Internal faults in the components
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 356
If a component detects a fault, it reports the fault across the bit-serial data interface to the DME/DDE. The DME/DDE then enters the fault in the
fault memory.
BSD Interface to the Alternator
The alternator with BSD interface can actively communicate with the engine control module. The alternator is not linked to the charge indicator
lamp, only to the engine control module. The alternator can detect a variety of faults.
Function
The following functions have been implemented in the engine control module for the alternator with BSD interface:
- Activating/deactivating the alternator on the basis of applicable parameters
- Specification of the maximum permitted degree of utilization of the alternator
- Control of the alternator's load response
- Calculation of the alternator moment degree of utilization
- Diagnosis of the data line between the alternator and the engine control
- Filing of alternator faults in the fault memory
Activating the load control lamp in instrument cluster via CAN
In comparison to alternators used so far, the display strategy of the load control lamp does not change when the alternator with BSD interface.
The basic function of the alternator is also ensured if the communication between the alternator and the engine control is interrupted.
Possible faults
The following possible faults can be distinguished from fault entries:
High temperature control: The alternator is overloaded; to be safe, the alternator voltage is reduced until the alternator has cooled down again. The
charge indicator lamp does not light up.
- Mechanical fault: The alternator is mechanically blocked or the belt drive has failed.
- Electrical fault: Exciter diode defect, excite interruption, overvoltage due to controller defect.
- Communication failure: Line defect between the engine control and alternator.
The following cannot be detected: Coil interruption or short-circuit
Battery charge indicator lamp
The signal for the charge indicator lamp to light up is transferred across CAN to the instrument cluster. The charge indicator lamp lights up if there
is mechanical and electrical fault (see above).
Detection
The above-mentioned calculation of the alternator moment and the rate of utilization of the alternator are heavily dependent on the type
(performance) and manufacturer.
This is why the alternator provides the engine control with this data. The engine control adapts its calculation and set values to the exact type.
Aim
The precise calculation of the alternator moment and control of the load response function enables good idling of the engine.
Control of the alternator voltage based on nominal values from the engine control enables a good charge balance of the battery.
Alternator Test
Alternator test
Proceed as described in the following to achieve the required setting in the metrology window:
- Change to measurement system
- Select 2. Measurement in the center right of the screen
- Select 1000 A current in the middle of the screen
After a short time the current value appears next to the voltage value.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 357
The following display is set up:
Oscilloscope Target Image, Alternator

The following illustration represents the voltage progression of an intact generator. The level of the individual waves depends on the current load
of the generator. The length of the waves depends on the engine speed. The higher the engine speed the shorter the waves.
At idle speed with consumer units switched on, an error-free generator should provide approximately this picture.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 358
Waveform
Examples of faulty generators are shown below.

The current as a function of engine speed also applies here.
Waveform
Generator with defective diode

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 359
Waveform
Generator with broken winding

DDE Power Supply For IBS (Without DME Digital Engine Electronics MSS65)
DDE power supply for IBS
TIS -> Document -> SI Technology -> 61 03 04092
Brief description:
The IBS is a mechatronic component for monitoring the battery condition.
The IBS is secured and connected to the negative terminal of the battery. The power supply for the IBS is fed across a separate cable. For data
transmission, the IBS is connected to the DME (Digital Engine Electronics) or DDE (Digital Diesel Electronics) via the BSD (bit-serial data
interface).
General information
Replacing the IBS.
The vehicle with the new IBS must be placed in the idle state for at least 3 hours: Only then can the new IBS determine the battery status.
The Check Control message <battery severely depleted> is then no longer displayed if the battery is adequately charged and the correct battery
charge state can be displayed.
Intelligent Battery Sensor IBS (DME Digital Engine Electronics MSS65)

Intelligent battery sensor IBS
Functional description, see BMW Technology:
Brief description
The IBS is a mechatronic component for monitoring the battery condition. The IBS is secured and connected to the negative terminal of the battery.
The power supply for the IBS is fed across a separate cable. For data transmission, the IBS is connected to the DME (Digital Engine Electronics) or
DDE (Digital Diesel Electronics) via the BSD (Bit-Serial Data) interface.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 360
General information
Replacing the IBS.
DDE Power Supply For IBS (Without DME Digital Engine Electronics MSS65)
DDE power supply for IBS
Brief description:
The IBS is a mechatronic component for monitoring the battery condition.
The IBS is secured and connected to the negative terminal of the battery. The power supply for the IBS is fed across a separate cable. For data
transmission, the IBS is connected to the DME (Digital Engine Electronics) or DDE (Digital Diesel Electronics) via the BSD (bit-serial data
interface).
General information
Replacing the IBS.
Intelligent Battery Sensor IBS (DME Digital Engine Electronics MSS65)

Intelligent battery sensor IBS
Brief description
The IBS is a mechatronic component for monitoring the battery condition. The IBS is secured and connected to the negative terminal of the battery.
The power supply for the IBS is fed across a separate cable. For data transmission, the IBS is connected to the DME (Digital Engine Electronics) or
DDE (Digital Diesel Electronics) via the BSD (Bit-Serial Data) interface.
General information
Replacing the IBS.

The alternator with BSD interface can actively communicate with the engine control module. The alternator is not linked to the charge indicator
lamp, only to the engine control module. The alternator can detect a variety of faults.
Function
The following functions have been implemented in the engine control module for the alternator with BSD interface:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 361
- Activating/deactivating the alternator on the basis of applicable parameters
- Specification of the maximum permitted degree of utilization of the alternator
- Control of the alternator's load response
- Calculation of the alternator moment degree of utilization
- Diagnosis of the data line between the alternator and the engine control
- Filing of alternator faults in the fault memory
Activating the load control lamp in instrument cluster via CAN
In comparison to alternators used so far, the display strategy of the load control lamp does not change when the alternator with BSD interface.
The basic function of the alternator is also ensured if the communication between the alternator and the engine control is interrupted.
Possible faults
The following possible faults can be distinguished from fault entries:
High temperature control: The alternator is overloaded; to be safe, the alternator voltage is reduced until the alternator has cooled down again. The
charge indicator lamp does not light up.
- Mechanical fault: The alternator is mechanically blocked or the belt drive has failed.
- Electrical fault: Exciter diode defect, excite interruption, overvoltage due to controller defect.
- Communication failure: Line defect between the engine control and alternator.
The following cannot be detected: Coil interruption or short-circuit
Battery charge indicator lamp
The signal for the charge indicator lamp to light up is transferred across CAN to the instrument cluster. The charge indicator lamp lights up if there
is mechanical and electrical fault (see above).
Detection
The above-mentioned calculation of the alternator moment and the rate of utilization of the alternator are heavily dependent on the type
(performance) and manufacturer.
This is why the alternator provides the engine control with this data. The engine control adapts its calculation and set values to the exact type.
Aim
The precise calculation of the alternator moment and control of the load response function enables good idling of the engine.
Control of the alternator voltage based on nominal values from the engine control enables a good charge balance of the battery.
Alternator Test
Alternator test
Proceed as described in the following to achieve the required setting in the metrology window:
- Change to measurement system
- Select 2. Measurement in the center right of the screen
- Select 1000 A current in the middle of the screen
After a short time the current value appears next to the voltage value.
The following display is set up:

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 362

The following illustration represents the voltage progression of an intact generator. The level of the individual waves depends on the current load
of the generator. The length of the waves depends on the engine speed. The higher the engine speed the shorter the waves.
At idle speed with consumer units switched on, an error-free generator should provide approximately this picture.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 363
Waveform
Examples of faulty generators are shown below.

The current as a function of engine speed also applies here.
Waveform
Generator with defective diode

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 364
Waveform
Generator with broken winding

Control-Module Test
Ambient-pressure sensor
The ambient-pressure sensor is installed directly in the engine control module; it s seated as a separate component on the printed circuit board. In
the engine control module, the value is checked to ensure it remains within permitted limits.
A fault code is entered if the ambient pressure is not within the expected range. The ambient pressure is required for functions in the engine control
module related to calculating the mixture composition. The ambient pressure falls the higher you go above sea level.
Vacuum Supply
System Test For Electrical Vacuum Pump MSS65
This test checks independently of engine operation whether the electrical vacuum pump is able to supply the partial vacuum necessary for braking
power assistance.
The vacuum pump is activated for a maximum of 20 s. At the start of the system test, the partial vacuum must not fall below the value of -300
mbar. If necessary, the partial vacuum must be reduced accordingly by pressing the brake pedal.
As soon as the partial vacuum falls below the value of -500 mbar, the test is regarded as OK.
The run conditions for the system test are:

- Vehicle stationary
- Engine stationary
- Brake pedal not operated
- Partial vacuum greater than -300 mbar
- Vacuum pump not activated
Valve Gear
Camshaft Sensor
The camshaft sensor registers the position of the camshaft with the aid of a sheet metal wheel with various apertures screwed to the camshaft. It
operates in accordance with the Hall effect principle.
Hall effect
A permanent magnet in the sensor produces a magnetic field. A conductor with current flowing through it is located in this magnetic field. An
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 365
electric voltage dependent on the strength of the magnetic field is produced in this conductor perpendicular to the current and perpendicular to the
magnetic field. The magnetic field in the sensor is varied by the camshaft sensor wheel and its apertures rotating passed the sensor. The teeth and
gaps on the sensor wheel can be recognized by means of the voltage.
Use of the camshaft sensor
It is necessary for the fully sequential injection system (fuel injection takes place individually for each cylinder at the specific firing point).
The variable camshaft control requires feedback of the current position of the camshaft for adjustment purposes.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 366
Terminal Control
Energy Diagnosis Terminal Control

Energy diagnosis: Terminal control
The terminal control is distributed across various control modules. The following block diagram provides an overview of the control modules
involved and the integration in the vehicle electrical system.
JBE .......................................................................................................................................................................................... Junction Box Electronics

sv ....................................................................................................................................................................... Distribution box from the Junction box
CAS .................................................................................................................................................................................................. Car Access System
RAD2 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Radio 2
(depends on level of equipment)
M-ASK .......................................................................................................................................................................... Multi Audio System Controller
CCC ................................................................................................................................................................................ Car Communication Computer
DME ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Digital Engine Electronics
DDE ....................................................................................................................................................................................... Digital Diesel Electronics
IBS ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Intelligent battery sensor
K-CAN SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................................... Bus system for body functions
MOST ........................................................................................................................................... Bus system in the area of audio and communication
PT-CAN ............................................................................................................................................ Bus system for power train and chassis functions
There are the following terminals:
Terminal 30:
Terminal 30 is routed from the battery terminal via the safety battery terminal to the front distribution box. As soon as the battery is connected to
the terminals, terminal 30 is live. Terminal 30 is at approx. 40 fuses of the distribution box.
Control modules supplied by terminal 30:
AL ............................................................................................................................................................... Active steering (up to model year 03/2005)

AHM ........................................................................................................................................................... Trailer module (up to model year 03/2007)
CA ............................................................................................................................................................. Comfort Access (up to model year 09/2006)
CAS .................................................................................................................................................................................................. Car Access System
CDC ................................................................................................................................................................. CD changer (up to model year 09/2004)
DME ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Digital Engine Electronics
DDE ....................................................................................................................................................................................... Digital Diesel Electronics
DWA ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Antitheft Alarm System
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 367
EGS .................................................................................................................................................... transmission control (up to model year 03/2005)
EPS ............................................................................................................................................................................ electromechanical power steering
EKP ....................................................................................................................................................... Electric fuel pump (up to model year 03/2005)
FRM ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... Footwell Module
FZD .............................................................................................................................................................................................. Roof Function Center
JBE .......................................................................................................................................................................................... Junction Box Electronics
KOMBI .................................................................................................................................................. Instrument cluster (up to model year 03/2007)
MRS5 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... Multiple Restraint System
SH ....................................................................................................................................................... Independent heating (up to model year 03/2005)
SMBF ............................................................................................................................................. Passenger seat module (up to model year 09/2006)
SMFA ................................................................................................................................................... Driver seat module (up to model year 09/2006)
SMG ............................................................................................................................................................................ Sequential manual transmission
(up to model year 03/2005)
SZL ................................................................................................................................................................................. Steering column switch center
Terminal 30g:
Terminal 30g is controlled by the CAS. When the overall vehicle is wakened by an operation of the user, terminal 30g is switched on. Terminal 30g
is automatically switched off after a codable after-run time (e.g. 30 minutes). The after-run time starts with the event terminal R Off. As in the case
of terminal 15, a relay in the distribution box is activated by the CAS via a semiconductor switch. The relay of terminal 30g switches the battery
voltage to approx. 18 fuses in the distribution box.
Control modules supplied by terminal 30g:
ACC ............................................................................................................................................................................................... Active cruise control

AL ............................................................................................................................................................... Active steering (as of model year 09/2005)
AMP ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... Amplifiers
CDC ................................................................................................................................................................. CD changer (as of model year 12/2004)
CID ..................................................................................................................................................................................... Central Information Display
CON ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Controller
CVM .......................................................................................................................................................................................... Convertible top module
DSC ....................................................................................................................................................................................... Dynamic Stability Control
DAB ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... Digital Tuner
EGS ..................................................................................................................................................... transmission control (as of model year 09/2005)
EKP ....................................................................................................................................................... Electric fuel pump (as of model year 09/2005)
IHKA .................................................................................................................................... Integrated automatic heating and air conditioning system
IHKR .................................................................................................................................................... Integrated heating / air-conditioning regulation
IHR ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Integrated Heater Control
LDM .................................................................................................................................................................... Longitudinal Dynamics Management
RAD ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Radio
RAD2 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Radio 2
RDC ............................................................................................................................................................................................. Tire Pressure Monitor
SDARS .................................................................................................................................................................................................... Satellite Tuner
SH ....................................................................................................................................................... Independent heating (as of model year 09/2005)
SHD ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Panorama glass roof (E91)
SMBF .............................................................................................................................................. Passenger seat module (as of model year 03/2007)
SMFA ................................................................................................................................................... Driver seat module (as of model year 03/2007)
SMG ............................................................................................................................................................................ Sequential manual transmission
(as of model year 09/2005)
TCU ....................................................................................................................................................................................... Telematic control module
(except US version)
ULF ............................................................................................................................................................... Universal Charging and Hands-Free Unit
ULF-SBX .................................................................................................................................................................................................. Interface box
ULF-SBX-H ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Interface box High
VM ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ Video module
VTG .................................................................................................................................................................... Transfer Case & Special Transmission
Terminal 30g-f:
Terminal 30g-f is a terminal 30 that is only switched off if faults are detected.
Terminal 30g-f only exists if a bistable relay is fitted. The relay is not visibly arranged in the distribution box. As a rule, the bistable relay is only
fitted together with the IBS.
On vehicles with CCC, M-ASK or independent heating, a relay of this kind is fitted. On some equipment variants with TCU, a bistable relay is also
fitted.
On vehicles without terminal 30g-f, the corresponding fuses are supplied with terminal 30g.
The JBE controls terminal 30g-f via a bistable relay in the distribution box. The bistable relay can be switched off or on. As a rule, the bistable
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 368
relay is always switched on. The bistable relay has two relay coils and it always remains in the last state activated (switched on or switched off).
The following three faults exist in which terminal 30g-f is switched off:
- Up to model year 09/2006:
1. As of approx. 60 minutes terminal R off, the DME/DDE starts a closed-circuit current measurement using the IBS. When the DME/DDE
determines a closed-circuit current fault, this wakes up the vehicle and sends a message for cutoff of terminal 30g-f. The JBE receives the
message and switches the bistable relay off.
Increased closed-circuit current due a switched-on auxiliary consumer unit is not a closed-circuit current fault for the DME/DDE.
Nonetheless, terminal 30g-f is switched off even if the starting capability limit is reached. The command for cutoff of terminal 30g-f is
also issued in this case by the DME/DDE.
2. As of terminal R off, the JBE monitors whether the vehicle is able to go into the idle state. The vehicle can only enter the idle state when
all the control modules are ready for this. If not all control modules have signaled this readiness approx. 30 minutes, the JBE switches
terminal 30g-f off. The JBE also saves all the control modules in the energy history memory that have not signaled readiness for the idle
state.
3. A few minutes after terminal R off, the vehicle has normally switched into the idle state. As of the idle state, the JBE counts how often
the vehicle is wakened. The JBE switches terminal 30g-f off when a vehicle has been wakened unexpectedly more than 30 time with
terminal R off. The JBE also stores the maximum number of waking events in the energy history memory.
As of model year 03/2007:
1. If an IBS is fitted, the power management in the DME/DDE monitors the closed-circuit current and the battery status. If the battery
charge state is close to the starting capability limit, the vehicle is wakened and a message to reset or shut down terminal 30g-f is sent. The
JBE regulates the bi-stable relay accordingly.
2. If the vehicle is wakened too often after shutdown of terminal 30g, the JBE switches terminal 30g-f off for approx. 10 seconds (reset). If
the vehicle is still wakened after the reset, terminal 30g-f is switched off permanently until the next terminal change (shutdown).
3. If the vehicle does not go to sleep after shutdown of terminal 30g, the JBE switches terminal 30g-f off for approx. 10 seconds (reset). If
the vehicle still does not go to sleep after the reset, terminal 30g-f is switched off permanently until the next terminal change (shutdown).
In all cases of cutoff, a fault is entered in the JBE. The cutoff of terminal 30g-f is independent of what triggered the detected fault. The cutoff is
only an attempt to remedy the fault in the vehicle and prevent it from not starting. The cutoff of terminal 30g-f does not necessarily mean that there
was a fault in a consumer unit of terminal 30g-f.
The switch-on condition for terminal 30g-f is switching on terminal R. For this reason, with terminal R or terminal 15, terminal 30g-f is always
switched on.
Control modules supplied by terminal 30g-f:
AHM ........................................................................................................................................................... Trailer module (as of model year 09/2007)

CA ............................................................................................................................................................. Comfort Access (as of model year 03/2007)
CCC ................................................................................................................................................................................ Car Communication Computer
CNAV ..................................................................................................................................................................................... Navigation system China
JNAV ........................................................................................................................................................................................ Japan navigation system
KNAV ..................................................................................................................................................................................... Navigation system Korea
KOMBI .................................................................................................................................................. Instrument cluster (as of model year 09/2007)
M-ASK .......................................................................................................................................................................... Multi Audio System Controller
TCU ....................................................................................................................................................................................... Telematic control module
(only US version)
Terminal 15:
Control of terminal 15 is by the CAS depending on operation of the start/stop button (with the key inserted in the key slot).
Terminal 15 is switched in the CAS via semiconductor switch. A relay in the distribution box is activated via the output of a semiconductor switch.
The relay switches the voltage of the battery to approx. 7 fuses in the distribution box. The consumer units of terminal 15 are essentially supplied
from here.
Control module supplied by terminal 15:
FLA ................................................................................................................................................................................. High beam headlight assistant

PDC ............................................................................................................................................................................................... Park distance control
For safety reasons, some control modules have a terminal 15 line directly from CAS, e.g. the FRM (footwell module).
Terminal 87:
The DME/DDE controls terminal 87 via a relay in the E-box. Terminal 87 is switched on as soon as terminal 15 is switched on. After terminal 15
has been switched off, terminal 87 is switched off by the DME/DDE with a slight delay.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 369
No control modules are supplied by terminal 87.
Terminal R:
Terminal R is not present as a hardware terminal. The status of terminal R is only communicated from CAS via the bus systems.
Car Access System (CAS)

Car access system (CAS)
TIS --> Document --> SI Technology --> SBT Number 61 03 03 019
Service functions
Replacing control modules
The following points must be borne in mind when the CAS or the engine control module are replaced:
- If a CAS control module is replaced, it must be ordered using the vehicle identification number (VIN). Following installation, that starting
value must be matched to the engine control module. This starting value match is performed using the service function "DME/DDE - CAS
calibration" in the BMW diagnosis system.
- If the engine control module is replaced, the drive-enable code must be transferred from the CAS to the engine control module following
installation. This operation is also performed using the service function öDME/DDE - CAS calibrationö in the BMW diagnosis system.
- After the calibration of the EWS and engine control module, these are mutually linked. It is not possible to replace one of the two control
modules as a test.
DME/DDE - CAS calibration
In the case of a new engine control module, the service function "DME/DDE - CAS calibration" in the BMW diagnosis system is used to read the
EWS drive-enable code from the CAS and transfer it into the engine control module. This means that the engine control module and the CAS
control module are mutually linked.
If the engine control module is already linked to the CAS, the service function is used to perform a starting value match. This means that the
random code calculation between the CAS and the engine control module is calibrated.
A start match is required if there is a variance in the random codes caused by the influence of faults in the two control modules.
As of EWS4, a start calibration is no longer required.
Locking the remote control/spare key
The service function öDisable/enable remote control/keyö in the BMW diagnosis system can be used to disable or enable remote control keys or
spare keys.
It is recommended that a remote control key is disabled if it is lost or stolen. With a disabled remote control key (or spare key) the engine can not be
started. The functions of the remote control are also disabled.
A remote control key or spare key can only be disabled if the remote control key or spare key has been used at least once and is currently not
inserted in the ignition lock.
To run the service function, it is required that a valid and enabled remote control key or a valid and enabled spare key is detected in the ignition
lock.
Activating of a new remote control
Insert the new remote control in the slot and hold in this position until the remote control locks into place. This can take up to ten seconds. After
locking, wait another five seconds. The remote control is then ready for use.
If the remote control is a replacement for a lost or defective remote control, the old remote control still has to be blocked using the service function
öblock/releaseö (see above). To use the Car/Key functions, the service function öPersonalization numberö has to be run.
Comparison Images EWS Oscilloscope Measurement (Help Text)

Comparison Images EWS Oscilloscope Measurement
Important
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 370
During the measurement, the DME/DDE must be connected. The CAS control module does not have to be enabled. As of terminal 15, it always
sends the EWS signal.
Fig. 1: Signal OK.
Bear in mind that the statement öOKö only refers to the data line and the signal form. It is unable to determine whether the transmitted code is
correct.
Fig. 2: Signal NOT OK.
The above signal indicates a fault in the DME/DDE.
Fig. 3: Signal NOT OK
The above signal indicates a wire fault or a fault in the CAS.
The above signal indicates a short circuit to positive.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 371
The above signal indicates a short circuit to ground or an open circuit.
Fault Profile 1 CAS Car Access System (CA Comfort Access System)
Comfort Access System
The Comfort Access System is composed of the part functions

- Comfort Entry (automatic access control),
- Comfort Go (automatic driver authorization) and
- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
The part function Comfort Entry enables comfortable access to the vehicle by
- actuating an outside door handle (TAG) or
- pressing the trunk lid/tailgate outside switch.
Comfort Go
The part function Comfort Go enables comfortable starting of the vehicle without the need to insert the remote control in the ignition lock.
Comfort Exit
The part function Comfort Exit enables comfortable locking of the vehicle.
Work on the Comfort Access
Following work on the Comfort Access, in particular on the door handles, it can be necessary to reset the Car Access System. The following two
methods are specifically designed for the purpose:
1. Per service function: Service Functions -> Drive -> CAS -> CAS Reset
2. Per control-module function under CAS
NOTE: When the CAS is reset, the lighting of the Start-Stop button is switched off briefly.
Comfort Access control module
The Comfort Access control module is fitted behind the right-hand cover in the luggage compartment. The Comfort Access control module
contains the following assemblies:
- CAN bus interface
- K-TAGE (outside door handle electronics) bus interface
- Driver stages for inductive antennas
- Power supply unit
The Comfort Access control module contains the fault memory for the door modules.
Car Access control module
The Car Access control module contains the following functions for the Passive Access system:
- Check of the identifier for access and driver authorization
- Fault memory for identifier
- Activation of the authentication of identifiers through requests from trunk switch or starter switch
The Car Access control module contains the fault memory for the identifiers.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 372
Comfort Access door module
The door modules of the Comfort Access system consist of the outside door handle electronics (TAGE) and the outside door handle (TAG). The
following functions are integrated in each outside door handle:
- a pull sensor to detect pulling on the outside door handle
- a pressure sensor to detect pressure on the outside door handle (only E65)
- a capacitive sensor to detect a hand inserted into the outside door handle
- a capacitive sensor to detect pressure on the outside door handle (not E65)
- a transmitter antenna to activate the identifier
The following are implemented in the outside door handle electronics:
- the link to the K-TAGE bus
Important: The K-TAGE bus is only looped through in the door control module!
- the power supply of the sensors

- the evaluation of the sensor signals
- the driver stage for the transmitter antennas
Inductive transmitter antennas
The Comfort Access control module activates the following 8 transmitter antennas:
- 4 footwell antennas in the vehicle
- 1 rear shelf antenna in the vehicle
- 2 rear antennas in the rear fender
- 1 luggage compartment antenna
With the 4 antennas in the doors, there are a total of 12 antennas inside and outside the vehicle.
K-CAN SYSTEM data bus
The K-CAN SYSTEM data bus is the data connection between the instrument cluster and the control modules in the chassis and suspension, drive
and body sections. Information is exchanged with data telegrams.
Comfort Access sub-bus (K-TAGE)
The K-TAGE bus links the following components of the access and driver authorization system:
- the Comfort Access control module
- the outside door handle electronics (TAGE) in all four doors
- the Car Access control module (CAS) as bus master
Identifiers
Alongside the normal functions of the radio remote control, the identifiers have a radio receiver. The radio receiver enables a response on the part
of the identifier to a radio signal from the transmitter antennas of the vehicle.
Main functions
The Comfort Entry and Comfort Go processes only start at a vehicle speed = 0.
Comfort Entry (unlocking the doors)
Actuating an outside door handle (TAG) and pressing the trunk lid/tailgate outside switch lead to a request for authentication of the identifier
belonging to the vehicle. The request is transmitted across the corresponding transmitter antenna in each TAG or in the fender. An identifier
belonging to the vehicle must be located in the transmission range of the antenna in order to respond to the request. Moreover, the Car Access
System (CAS) checks whether the identifier has access authorization for the vehicle. If this is the case, unlocking of the doors or trunk lid/tailgate is
triggered. The unlocked component is determined by the subassembly that triggers the authentication process (outside door handle or trunk
lid/tailgate outside switch).
When the luggage compartment is closed, the luggage compartment antenna requests authentication of the identifier belonging to the vehicle. If an
identifier in the luggage compartment replies and there is no other identifier outside the luggage compartment, the luggage-compartment lid is
opened again. If another identifier is found outside the luggage compartment, the luggage-compartment lid remains closed. The identifier located in
the luggage compartment is blocked as a possible transmitter for the next unlocking of the vehicle.
Comfort Go (starting the vehicle)
When the start button is pressed and the brake pedal is pressed, the vehicle interior antennas search for an identifier located in the vehicle. If an
identifier belonging to the vehicle is located in the vehicle, an authentication of the identifier is carried out. If the identifier has start authorization
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 373
for the vehicle, the CAS enables the start. The antennas are activated by the Comfort Access control module.
Comfort Exit (securing the vehicle)
The request to lock the vehicle is activated by pressing an outside door handle. The request is only processed if all the doors are closed. This is
followed by an outdoor search for the identifier via the outside antennas. If an identifier is found outside the vehicle, the vehicle is locked. To
implement the lockout safety device function, this is followed by a search for an identifier in the passenger compartment. If the identifier that was
authenticated at the outside door handle is also detected in the passenger compartment, the vehicle is unlocked again. Other identifiers belonging to
the vehicle can remain in the vehicle. In order to inform the driver about this identifier, a corresponding Check Control message is generated.
Unlocking and opening the trunk lid/tailgate
The request to open the trunk lid/tailgate of the vehicle is triggered by pressing the trunk lid/tailgate outside switch. When the vehicle is locked, this
leads to a search for an identifier via the rear antennas. The request for the search is sent by the power module via CAN to the CAS and from there
to the Comfort Access control module. This runs the search for the identifier.
Closing rear lid
The lock of the luggage-compartment lid closes mechanically. If the status 'trunk lid/tailgate locked' is detected by the power module, the Comfort
Access control module starts a search for the identifier via the luggage compartment antenna. If an identifier in the luggage compartment replies,
the CAS control module transmits the command to open the trunk lid/tailgate to the power module. The boot lid/tailgate lift opens the boot
lid/tailgate. If another valid identifier is located in the transmission range of the vehicle aerials, the luggage compartment remains closed. The
identifier locked in the luggage compartment is disabled for the next opening of the vehicle.
Assignment of an identifier
The assignment of an identifier to a certain antenna of the vehicle is carried out automatically. Here, the antennas of the vehicle are activated
successively with delays by radio signals. The time delays create a time window for each antenna in which an identifier found by this antenna can
reply. The reply of the identifier in this time window enables allocation of the position of the identifier to a transmitter antenna.
Granting access authorization/start authorization
After receipt of a radio signal from the assigned transmitter antenna of the vehicle, the identifier transmitter returns a radio code. If the right data is
received in the radio remote control receiver in the vehicle, the functions are enabled. In this way, without actuating the remote control, access
authorization and/or start authorization are granted.
Misuse protection
The capacitive sensor in the outside door handle is disabled if activated repeatedly. The consequence of this for the customer is a noticeable delay
in opening the door. Misuse protection is reset when the central locking system is unlocked, at the latest.
Anti-repeat circuits
If the central locking system switches from the state 'UNLOCKED' to 'LOCKED' 20 times within 2 minutes, no unlocking is possible for approx. 2
minutes. If the anti-repeat circuit is active, the door on the E65 can still be opened, as the electrical opening motor is still activated and this raises
the locking pawl. A state can come about, however, whereby the door is open but the locking button is set at LOCKED.
This electrical auxiliary motor reaches the anti-repeat circuit after being activated 50 times. This occurs if the door is opened repeatedly when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Initialization
For the Comfort Access System, the following assemblies must be initialized.
- Comfort Access control module
- Outside door handle electronics, driver's door
- Outside door handle electronics, driver's door, rear (if present)
- Outside door handle electronics, passenger's door
- Outside door handle electronics, passenger's door, rear (if present)
Initializing Comfort Access control module and outside door handles
After replacement of the Comfort Access control module or an outside door handle, initialization must be carried out. The initialization is triggered
by switching terminal 0 to terminal R. When terminal R is switched, the Car Access control module transmits the initialization automatically to the
Comfort Access control module and this in turn transmits to the outside door handles. There is also the possibility to initialize the control modules
using a test module: Diagnostic heads / Service functions / Comfort Access / Initialization. The initialization can be checked in this test module.
Fault Profile 3 CAS Car Access System (With Coupe)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 374

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 375
Identifiers
Main functions
Closing rear lid
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 376
Misuse protection
Initialization
Fault Profile 7 CAS Car Access System (Without Automatic Transmission)

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 377
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 378
Identifiers
Main functions
Closing rear lid
Misuse protection
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 379
Initialization
Fault Profile 8 CAS Car Access System (With Automatic Transmission)

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 380

Identifiers
Main functions
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 381
Closing rear lid
Misuse protection
Initialization

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 382
Fault Profile 11 CAS Car Access System

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 383

Identifiers
Main functions
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 384
Closing rear lid
Misuse protection
Initialization
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 385
Engine Start
Car Access System (CAS)

Car access system (CAS)
TIS --> Document --> SI Technology --> SBT Number 61 03 03 019
Service functions
Replacing control modules
The following points must be borne in mind when the CAS or the engine control module are replaced:
- If a CAS control module is replaced, it must be ordered using the vehicle identification number (VIN). Following installation, that starting
value must be matched to the engine control module. This starting value match is performed using the service function "DME/DDE - CAS
calibration" in the BMW diagnosis system.
- If the engine control module is replaced, the drive-enable code must be transferred from the CAS to the engine control module following
installation. This operation is also performed using the service function öDME/DDE - CAS calibrationö in the BMW diagnosis system.
- After the calibration of the EWS and engine control module, these are mutually linked. It is not possible to replace one of the two control
modules as a test.
DME/DDE - CAS calibration
In the case of a new engine control module, the service function "DME/DDE - CAS calibration" in the BMW diagnosis system is used to read the
EWS drive-enable code from the CAS and transfer it into the engine control module. This means that the engine control module and the CAS
control module are mutually linked.
If the engine control module is already linked to the CAS, the service function is used to perform a starting value match. This means that the
random code calculation between the CAS and the engine control module is calibrated.
A start match is required if there is a variance in the random codes caused by the influence of faults in the two control modules.
As of EWS4, a start calibration is no longer required.
Locking the remote control/spare key
The service function öDisable/enable remote control/keyö in the BMW diagnosis system can be used to disable or enable remote control keys or
spare keys.
It is recommended that a remote control key is disabled if it is lost or stolen. With a disabled remote control key (or spare key) the engine can not be
started. The functions of the remote control are also disabled.
A remote control key or spare key can only be disabled if the remote control key or spare key has been used at least once and is currently not
inserted in the ignition lock.
To run the service function, it is required that a valid and enabled remote control key or a valid and enabled spare key is detected in the ignition
lock.
Activating of a new remote control
Insert the new remote control in the slot and hold in this position until the remote control locks into place. This can take up to ten seconds. After
locking, wait another five seconds. The remote control is then ready for use.
If the remote control is a replacement for a lost or defective remote control, the old remote control still has to be blocked using the service function
öblock/releaseö (see above). To use the Car/Key functions, the service function öPersonalization numberö has to be run.
Comparison Images For Interlock Locking Pawl

Comparison Images For Interlock Locking Pawl
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 386
Top View
Fig. 1: top interlock locking pawl (top view).
Side View
Fig. 2: top interlock locking pawl (side view).
Top View
Fig. 3: bottom interlock locking pawl (top view)

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 387
Side View
Fig. 4: bottom interlock locking pawl (side view).

Comparison Images EWS Oscilloscope Measurement (Help Text)
Important
During the measurement, the DME/DDE must be connected. The CAS control module does not have to be enabled. As of terminal 15, it always
sends the EWS signal.
Fig. 1: Signal OK.
Bear in mind that the statement öOKö only refers to the data line and the signal form. It is unable to determine whether the transmitted code is
correct.
Fig. 2: Signal NOT OK.
The above signal indicates a fault in the DME/DDE.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 388
The above signal indicates a wire fault or a fault in the CAS.
The above signal indicates a short circuit to positive.
The above signal indicates a short circuit to ground or an open circuit.

Important
During the measurement, the DSC must be connected.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 389
Fig. 1: Signal OK.
The speed signal from the DSC control module must be a rectangular signal with amplitude battery voltage.
Fig. 2: Signal not OK
The above illustration indicates a short circuit to ground.
Fig. 3: Signal not OK
The above illustration indicates a break in wiring and/or a problem with the DSC.
Fault Profile 1 CAS Car Access System (CA Comfort Access System)

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 390
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit


BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 391
Identifiers
Main functions
Closing rear lid
Misuse protection
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 392
Initialization
Fault Profile 3 CAS Car Access System (With Coupe)

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 393

Identifiers
Main functions
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 394
Closing rear lid
Misuse protection
Initialization
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 395
Fault Profile 7 CAS Car Access System (Without Automatic Transmission)

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 396

Identifiers
Main functions
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 397
Closing rear lid
Misuse protection
Initialization
Fault Profile 8 CAS Car Access System (With Automatic Transmission)

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 398
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 399
Identifiers
Main functions
Closing rear lid
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 400
Misuse protection
Initialization
Fault Profile 11 CAS Car Access System

- Comfort Exit.
Comfort Entry
Comfort Go
Comfort Exit

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 401
- CAN bus interface
- Power supply unit

Identifiers
Main functions
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 402
Closing rear lid
Misuse protection
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 403
Initialization
Slide-In Compartment
Comparison Images Radio-Control Key Slot
Index
Fig. 1: slot: without damage

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 404
Index
Fig. 2: slot: remote control has been forcibly removed
Index
Fig. 3: slot: retaining lug broken (example)

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 405
Ignition System: Service and Repair
12 00 ... - Instructions for working on the ignition system
Caution!
Always switch off ignition before working on ignition system.
Use only test leads which have been approved and belong to these testing instruments (e.g. DIS Tester).
Comply with operating instructions of the respective testing instrument used.
Comply with the country-specific safety regulations.
Never touch components under current with engine running!
Comply with instructions of DIS tester.
Do not connect any suppression capacitors or inspection lamps to terminal 1 on the ignition coil.
Terminal 1 of ignition coil must not be connected to ground or battery positive lead.
If an alarm system is subsequently installed, lead of terminal 1 must not be used for start prevention.
When working on ignition system, always disconnect supply leads to ignition coils.
High tension! - High tension!
Important!
Hazardous voltages occur at:
- Ignition lead
- spark-plug connectors
- spark plugs
- Ignition coil (high voltage at terminal 4 is approx. 40 kV)
- Lead of terminal 1 from ignition coil to DME control unit (high voltage approx. 350 V)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 406
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing Pulse Generator on Left Inlet Camshaft
13 62 601 - Replacing pulse generator on left inlet camshaft (S65)
(cylinder bank 5 to 8)

- Remove intake filter housing See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Air Filter Element/Service and Repair
- Remove left ignition coil cover
Release plug connector (1) and pull off.

Release screw.
Remove pulse generator (2).
Installation Note:
Replace sealing ring and coat with antiseize agent.
Tightening torque, 13 62 5AZ See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Sensors (S65)
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 407
Replacing Pulse Generator on Right Inlet Camshaft
13 62 602 - Replacing pulse generator on right inlet camshaft (S65)

- Release and raise coolant expansion tank. Do not kink hoses.
- Remove right ignition coil cover

Release screw.
Installation Note:
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 408
Replacing Pulse Generator on Left Exhaust Camshaft
13 62 604 - Replacing pulse generator on left exhaust camshaft (S65)

- Remove intake filter housing See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Air Filter Element/Service and Repair
- Remove left ignition coil cover

Release screw.
Installation Note:
Aluminium screws must always be replaced.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 409
Replacing Pulse Generator on Right Exhaust Camshaft
13 62 605 - Replacing pulse generator on right exhaust camshaft (S65)

- Release and raise coolant expansion tank. Do not kink hoses.
- Remove right ignition coil cover

Release screw.
Installation Note:
Aluminium screws must always be replaced.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 410
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing Pulse Generator on Transmission
13 62 607 - Replacing pulse generator on transmission (S65)

- Remove underbody protection
Important!
Oil emerges when the pulse generator is removed. Catch oil in a suitable container and dispose of this oil in accordance with country-specific
regulations.

Release screw (1).
Remove pulse generator.
Note:
Top up transmission fluid. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Manual Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/Changing /
Topping Up / Checking Gear Oil in Manual Transmission
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 411
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing Pulse Generator on Crankshaft/Transmission
13 62 610 - Replacing pulse generator on crankshaft/transmission (S65)

- Remove underbody protection See: Body and Frame/Splash Guard/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Front Underbody
Protection
- Remove reinforcement plate See: Body and Frame/Frame/Structural Brace/Service and Repair
Release screws (1).

Remove cover.

Release screw (1).
Remove pulse generator.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 412
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 413
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
12 13 512 - Removing and installing/replacing all ignition coils (S65)

- 11 9 980 See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tools and Equipment/11 9 980 Puller

- Read out fault memory of DME control unit
- Remove air filter housing See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair
- Release and raise coolant expansion tank, do not kink hoses
- Remove ignition coil cover on left and right
Pull off plug (1).

Pull out ignition coil (2) in upward direction with aid of 11 9 980 See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tools and Equipment/11 9 980 Puller.
This tool is essential to ensure damage-free removal of the ignition coils.
This procedure is applicable to all ignition coils.
Installation Note:
Insert rubber seal on ignition coils between guides in cylinder head cover.
Note:
Assemble engine.
Check stored fault messages.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 414
Spark Plug: Application and ID
The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB SI B12 01 05 dated February 2010.
This technical service bulletin (12 01 05) was first published in May of 2005 (that is the meaning of the 05) and has been updated several times, if
you are currently viewing an older vehicle and you wish to see the full text of this TSB, consider selecting a 2006 (or newer) E90 (3 Series) or E60
(5 Series) with the N52 engine.
SPARK PLUG APPLICATION CHART
Application And ID
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 415
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
12 12 011 - Replacing all spark plugs (S65)

- 12 1 171
- 12 1 172

- Switch off ignition.
- Remove all ignition coils See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair.
Important!
Wear protective goggles.
Oil and dirt particles may get into your eyes!
Clean spark plug slot with compressed air.
Unscrew spark plugs with special tool 12 1 171.
Installation Note:
Tighten down spark plugs with special tool 12 1 171 and special tool 12 1 172 (torque limiter).
Without special tool 12 1 172, observe tightening torque.
Tightening torque 12 12 1AZ See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Ignition.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 416
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction: Tools and Equipment
13 0 131 Compressed Air Hose with Filter

13 0 131 Compressed air hose with filter
13 0 132 Adapter
13 0 132 Adapter
13 0 133 Container
13 0 133 Container
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 417
13 3 010 Hose Clip

13 3 010 Hose clip
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 418
13 5 270 Adapter Hose with Coupler Plug

13 5 270 Adapter hose with coupler plug
13 6 058 T-Piece for 12 mm Dia. Line

13 6 058 T-piece for 12 mm dia. line
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 419
16 1 020 Pin Wrench

16 1 020 Pin wrench
16 1 070 Plug (Carbon Canister)

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 420
16 1 070 Plug (carbon canister)
16 1 080 Hose Guide

16 1 080 Hose guide
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 421
16 1 170 Tester with Test Adapter

16 1 170 Tester with test adapter
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 422
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Notes on Fuel Pressure Check (Reference Pressure - Environment)
13 31 ... - Notes on fuel pressure check (reference pressure: environment)
Feature of this version with ambient pressure:

The connection for the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator is located between the throttle and the air cleaner or on the air cleaner.
Test precondition:
The correct fuel pressure regulator is fitted.
- Using the EPC, check whether the fuel pressure regulator suitable for the car is fitted:
Connect test adapter.
Description of operation:
The control function of the fuel pressure regulator must be guaranteed under all operating conditions. The fuel pump must always be able to
generate a higher fuel pressure than the pressure regulated by the pressure regulator.
The injection rate is adjusted by means of the injection time; the injection time is controlled by the DME.
Description of operation: fuel return line
When the engine is at a standstill and the ignition key is in position 0, the fuel return line after the pressure regulator is at zero pressure.
Description of operation: pressure retaining function
The pressure regulator closes when the engine is at a standstill and the ignition key is in position 0. The fuel pressure in the delivery line is retained
over an extended period. A non-return valve closes in the fuel pump. These measures help to retain the fuel pressure in the fuel system. Extended
starting times are thus avoided.
Complaint: drive characteristic faults, lack of power
- Run engine at idle speed and measure fuel pressure.
If the measured value is less than the nominal value - 0.2 bar:
- Line cross-sections in fuel feed are constricted or fuel filter is clogged,
or
- Fuel pump voltage supply is not O.K.: e.g. as a result of high contact resistance (corrosion) in plug connection between wiring harness and fuel
pump.
If the measured value is greater than the nominal value + 0.2 bar:
- Turn off engine stop and then observe measured value.

- If measured value drops to nominal value, then line cross-sections in fuel return are constricted or clogged.
- Check the fuel lines for kinks.
If no kinks are visible:
- Replace return lines
If measured value remains too high, then pressure regulator is in all probability faulty.
Important:
With less likelihood, the return line may be completely blocked. When the pressure regulator is removed, fuel could escape under pressure!
- Have a cleaning cloth ready and catch and dispose of escaping fuel.
- Replace the return line but not the pressure regulator.
Complaint: starting problems
- Run engine briefly at idle speed and switch off.

- Note down measured value while engine is stopped.
- Read off measured value again after approx. 20 to 30 minutes while engine is stopped.
Special tool 13 3 010 (hose clamp) is required for the following test.
If the measured value has dropped by more than 0.5 bar:
- Start engine and wait briefly for a stable pressure increase.

- Switch off the engine and immediately pinch off the delivery line just before the pressure gauge with the special tool 13 3 010.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 423
- Note down measured value
- Read off measured value again after approx. 20 to 30 minutes while engine is stopped
If the measured value has now dropped by less than 0.5 bar, the following faults can be present:
- Fault in delivery lines

- Fault in in-tank delivery hose
- Faulty pressure-holding non-return valve in fuel pump
Check components. Replace faulty components.
If the measured value has dropped by more than 0.5 bar again:
- Replace pressure regulator
Note:
- All the fuel hoses and hose clips which were detached within the framework of the checks must be replaced.
- Interrogate fault memory of DME control unit. Check stored fault messages. Rectify faults. Now clear the fault memory.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 424
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Checking Fuel Feed Pressure
13 31 028 - Checking fuel feed pressure (S65)

- 13 5 270 See: Tools and Equipment/13 5 270 Adapter Hose with Coupler Plug

- Connect DIS Tester.
- Remove air intake filter housing See: Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair
Recycling:
Catch and dispose of escaping fuel in a suitable container.
Disconnect quick-release coupling (1) from feed line (2).

Insert special tool 13 5 270 See: Tools and Equipment/13 5 270 Adapter Hose with Coupler Plug between lines (1) and (2).
Connect pressure sensor (3) of DIS Tester.
Switch on ignition. Read off fuel feed pressure at BMW diagnosis system.
Fuel pressure, refer to Technical Data See: Specifications/Fuel Pump with Drive and Pipe.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 425
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
35 40 001 - Removing and installing or replacing accelerator pedal module
Take off cap.

Release screw.
Pull accelerator pedal module upwards out of fixture.
Installation:
Pull off plug (1).

Remove accelerator pedal module.
Important!
Accelerator pedal module can only be replaced completely with adapter plate.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 426
Air Cleaner Housing: Service and Repair
13 71 000 - Removing and installing/replacing intake filter housing (S65)

Remove intake filter element See: Air Filter Element/Service and Repair
Release screws.
Raise intake filter housing, pull out of intake duct and remove in upward direction.
Installation:
Pay attention to position of spacer buffers during installation.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 427
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
13 72 001 - Replacing air filter element (S65)
Release screws.
Remove top section (1) of intake filter housing.
Release clamp (1) for intermediate flange.

Press air filter element outwards against spring force and remove.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 428
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
13 62 560 - Removing and installing/replacing air-mass sensor (secondary air) (S65)

- Remove intake air manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair

Release hose connections.
Pull air-mass flow sensor (1) from air intake hose.
Installation:
Check sealing ring between air-mass sensor and air intake hoses for damage, replace if necessary.
Assemble engine.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 429
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair
16 14 016 - Removing and installing / replacing fuel filter with pressure regulator

- 16 1 020 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 020 Pin Wrench
Recycling
Fuel escapes when fuel lines are detached. Have a suitable collecting container ready.
Catch and dispose of escaping fuel.
Important!
Ensure adequate ventilation in the place of work!
Avoid skin contact (wear gloves)!
Ensure absolute cleanliness when working on the open fuel tank.
Before starting the engine for the first time:
- Fill fuel tank with at least 5 litres of fuel.

- Draw off fuel from fuel tank See: Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Procedures
- Remove rear seat bench See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Rear Seat, Through-Loading/Removing and Installing/Replacing
Left or Right Rear Seat (Through-Loading)
- Remove right sensor unit
After completing work:
- Check repumping function of suction-jet pump See: Fuel Pump/Testing and Inspection
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 430
Release screws (1) and remove cover (2) from left side of fuel tank.
Press grey ring (1) towards sensor unit and detach fuel feed line (3).
Important!
Do not use any tools to release the quick-release fasteners.
Release screw cap with special tool 16 1 020 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 020 Pin Wrench and remove service cap.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 431
Installation:
Tightening torque 16 14 1AZ See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Fuel Pump.
Important!
After tightening to specified torque, notch (1) on screw cap (2) must be in area (A)!
Note:
Illustration shows the tank removed.
Installation:
Service cap can only be installed in one position.
When installing, make sure lug (1) of service cap engages in corresponding opening (2) on fuel tank.
Make sure that the lever sensor moves freely before fitting the service cap.
Clean sealing faces and install new seal.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 432
Attach an auxiliary lead (1) to hose pack (2) through service opening.
The auxiliary lead is pulled through with the hose pack towards the left and facilitates subsequent reinstallation.
Carefully lift sensor unit (1) out of tank.
In so doing, press tab (2) against spring force in order to make it easier to feed sensor unit out of tank.
Remove fuel filter (1) and hose pack (2) with auxiliary cable to left.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 433
Installation:
When replacing the fuel filter, modify the end of the auxiliary lead to the new hose pack and carefully pull in through the tank.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 434
Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
Fuel Supply System (Petrol/Gasoline)
16 00 ... - Fuel supply system (petrol/gasoline)
1. General
General function description of fuel system See: General Function Description for Fuel Supply Systems.
2. Component designation
Schematic drawings of fuel supply systems
Fuel supply system (ECE/Japan)

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 435
Fuel supply system (US version)
3. Function description (see also drawing)

Fuel system
The saddle-shaped fuel tank contains the surge chamber with integrated electric fuel pump on its right side.
The surge chamber ensures that the fuel pump is properly supplied in all vehicle operating states.
The fuel is pumped from the right side of the fuel tank into the surge chamber via the suction jet pump integrated in the surge chamber.
The suction jet pump in the left fuel tank half pumps the fuel through the tank expansion line to the right side of the fuel tank.
The suction jet pump is operated via the fuel feed line.
Return line, pressure regulator and fuel filter are located in the tank.
Fuel supply to engine:
The fuel is routed from the electric fuel pump via the fuel feed line and the fuel filter/pressure regulator unit to the fuel rail.
Pressure regulator and fuel filter are incorporated in a single unit in the tank. There is thus no need for a fuel return line.
The fuel passes through the pressure regulator into the left side of the fuel tank and thereby drives a suction jet pump. This pump repumps the fuel
from the left side of the tank to the right side.
The fuel rail is return-free.
Tank venting system (US version):
The fuel tank is vented during refuelling via the refuelling vent line.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 436
Because of its large cross-section, the refuelling vent line directs the displaced volume (fuel vapours) at high speed through the expansion volume
to the carbon canister.
The activated carbon retains the fuel contained in the fuel vapours. The cleaned air is discharged to atmosphere via the evaporation line, the tank
leak diagnosis module and the dust filter.
During driving, the system tank is vented in the same way via the vent line.
The condensed constituents of the fuel vapours remain in the tank because the tank has an integrated compensating volume.
The refuelling shutoff valve in the fuel tank is closed by the rising fuel if the fuel tank is overfilled. The ventilation function is maintained by a
second float valve.
Al three valves are designed as rollover valves. This prevents fuel from escaping from the fuel tank in extreme vehicle positions (overturning,
inclined position).
The carbon canister is regenerated by purging with fresh air.
The DME control unit opens the tank vent valve. Thus the vacuum pressure of the engine intake manifold is applied at the purge air line. The
carbon canister is purged in this way. The fresh air needed for this purpose is supplied via the tank leak diagnosis module and the dust filter. The
fuel constituents bound by the activated carbon are flushed out by the supplied air and directed via the purge line to the engine for combustion.
This operation is only possible while the engine is running.
Tank venting system (worldwide):
Refer to Tank venting system (US version) with following differences:

1. Carbon canister has a smaller capacity.
2. No tank leak diagnosis module or dust filter.
Leak diagnosis for tank venting system (US version):
The tank leak diagnosis module (see drawing 5.2) serves to diagnose leakages for the tank venting system within the on-board diagnosis laid down
by legislation.
The tank venting system is pressurised and the pressure loss is detected in the event of a leak.
The tank leak diagnosis module is activated by the DME control unit and detects the pressure loss by way of the power consumption of the
integrated pump. The air required for this purpose is supplied via the dust filter.
The pressure test line establishes the connection between fuel tank and fuel filler neck. This enables a leak to be detected in the fuel filler pipe - fuel
tank cap area.
Determining fill level in fuel tank:
The fuel level is measured by means of lever-type sensors on both sides of the fuel tank. The combination of the determined ohm values from the
right and left lever-type sensors produces the actual level in the fuel tank.
4. Service data, fuel system
Fuel pump operating pressure See: Fuel Pressure/Specifications/Fuel Pump.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 437
Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
General Function Description for Fuel Supply Systems
16 00 - General function description for fuel supply systems
Fuel supply systems, spark-ignition engines
Fuel system
The electric fuel pump in the fuel tank generates the pressure in the fuel system which is set by the pressure regulator to a specific level.
Tank venting system
The tank venting system is an enclosed system which is vented via a carbon canister. The carbon is incorporated in the carbon canister as granulate.
The large surface of the carbon stores the fuel vapors which occur in the fuel tank. The carbon canister must be regenerated on a regular basis so as
to be able to continue storing fuel vapors. Regeneration is performed by way of purging with fresh air via the intake manifold. This process is
controlled by the engine control unit.
Fuel supply systems, diesel engines
Fuel system
The electric fuel pump in the fuel tank supplies the engine with fuel. Two types of high-pressure pump are used for cylinder injection.
1. The distributor injection pump supplies each cylinder directly with fuel via the corresponding injection nozzle.
2. The high-pressure pump for the common rail systems generates in the fuel rail the necessary pressure for all the injection nozzles.
In common rail systems, a further pump (inline pump, M57/gear pump, M67) is connected between the high-pressure pump and the electric fuel
pump. This pump supports the fuel pump in the fuel tank in the event of a high fuel demand.
Tank venting system
Diesel fuel is non-volatile and therefore a carbon canister is not required. The fuel tank is vented directly to atmosphere.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 438
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Service and Repair
16 14 016 - Removing and installing / replacing fuel filter with pressure regulator

Recycling
Important!

- Remove right sensor unit
After completing work:
- Check repumping function of suction-jet pump See: Fuel Pump/Testing and Inspection
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 439
Press grey ring (1) towards sensor unit and detach fuel feed line (3).
Important!
Do not use any tools to release the quick-release fasteners.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 440
Installation:
Important!
After tightening to specified torque, notch (1) on screw cap (2) must be in area (A)!
Note:
Installation:

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 441
Remove fuel filter (1) and hose pack (2) with auxiliary cable to left.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 442
Installation:
When replacing the fuel filter, modify the end of the auxiliary lead to the new hose pack and carefully pull in through the tank.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 443
Fuel Pump: Testing and Inspection
16 12 ... - Checking repumping function of suction-jet pump with BMW diagnosis system
Important!
Contaminants in the fuel tank can impair driving operation or may even result in vehicle breakdown!
Catch escaping fuel in a suitable container.

- Fill level must be <= 28 l
- If necessary, draw off fuel from fuel tank See: Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Procedures
- Pour two to three litres of fuel into the left tank chamber via the flange opening
- Connect diagnosis system
- Path:
- Brief test KOMBI Instrument cluster
- Diagnosis control unit functions
- Diagnosis requests
- Tank sensor 1, tank sensor 2
Note:
Tank sensor 1 = right tank sensor
Tank sensor 2 = left tank sensor
Start engine.
Compare display for left and right tank chambers.
Repumping function OK
If fill level of tank sensor 2 (left chamber) is falling (approx. one litre per minute).
Repumping function not OK
If fill level of tank sensor 2 (left chamber) is stable or rising.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 444
Fuel Pump: Service and Repair
16 14 010 - Removing and installing or replacing fuel pump

Recycling
Important!
- Fill fuel tank with at least 5 litres of fuel

- Check transfer function of suction jet pump See: Testing and Inspection

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 445
Release screws (1) and remove cover (2) from right side of fuel tank.
USA national version:
Unlock and detach vent lines (2).
If necessary, remove fuel line for independent heating.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 446
ECE national version:
Unlock and detach vent line (2).
Installation:
Procedure for tightening screw cap, see next work step.
Important!
Fit screw cap without using a tool and tighten hand-tight.
Then tighten screw cap with special tool 16 1 020 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 020 Pin Wrench until notch (1) points to marking (2).
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 447
Carefully raise service cap (1).
Unlock and detach vent line (2).
Installation:
Clean sealing faces and install new seal (3).
Locating rods (4) must fit correctly in the hole of the delivery unit.
Installation:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 448
Installation:
Connect cable with cable tie (2).
Ensure correct routing of cables.
Unlock quick-connect coupling (1) of fuel feed line and pull off hose pack (2) in upward direction.
Unlock catch (4) and detach corrugated tube (3) towards top.
Important!
Do not use any tools to release the fuel feed line.
Draw off remaining fuel from surge chamber.
Carefully remove fuel pump with level sensor from fuel tank. If necessary, turn fuel pump 90° counterclockwise and tilt towards lever sensor.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 449
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
16 14 500 - Removing and installing or replacing control unit for electric fuel pump
Important!

- E81, E82, E87, E91 and E92:
Remove backrest side section See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Rear Seat, Through-Loading/Removing and
Installing/Replacing Rest Side Section on Left or Right Rear Seat Backrest for right rear seat
- E90:
Remove backrest

Release nuts (2) and remove control unit (3).
Installation Note:
Replacement:
- Except for M3, carry out programming/coding See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Vehicle Programming and Coding
(M3 is not programming- or coding-relevant)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 450
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
13 53 240 - Replacing complete injection pipe (S65)

- 11 5 210
- 13 5 281

Recycling
Fuel escapes when fuel line is detached. Catch and dispose of escaping fuel.
Release screws (1).

Unclip fuel line (2).
Unlock plugs on fuel injectors and disconnect.
Unlock, disconnect and seal fuel line (3).
Remove injection pipe.
Seal openings for fuel injectors in throttle valve housings with special tool 11 5 210.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 451
Seal fuel hose with special tool 13 5 281.
Lever out retainers (1).

Pull fuel injectors out of injection pipe.
Installation Note:
Replace sealing rings on fuel injectors and coat with anti-friction agent.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 452
Fuel Tank: Procedures
16 00 005 - Draining and filling fuel tank

- 16 1 080 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 080 Hose Guide
Recycling
Important!
Connect the exhaust and extraction systems to the exhaust tailpipe.
The electric fuel pump must not operate without fuel! After completing repairs but before starting the engine for the first time, fill the fuel tank
with min. 5 l fuel through the fuel filler pipe.
Do not damage non-return flap when pulling out extraction hose.
Diesel vehicles:
Note:
Before starting the engine for the first time, if the tank has been run dry or drawn off, fill with diesel fuel and turn on ignition for approx. 1
minute. The fuel circuit is thus filled and vented, which results in the engine firing more quickly.
Drawing off fuel:
Start engine and allow to run.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 453
Note:
The electric fuel pump runs.
In this way, the fuel is repumped through the suction jet pump from the left to the right side of the fuel tank.
Fuel can be drawn out of left and right sides of tank through filler neck, leaving only a small residue. The residual quantity is drawn off through
the service opening (on right/left).
Insert special tool 16 1 080 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 080 Hose Guide into filler neck.
Special tool 16 1 080 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 080 Hose Guide has two different diameters for petrol/gasoline and diesel vehicles!
Slide extraction hose of extractor unit, through special tool 16 1 080 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 080 Hose Guide into the fuel filler pipe,
turning in the process if necessary.
Insertion length approx. 120 cm.
Important!
Comply with the following instruction if the extraction hose can only be inserted approx. 100 cm before meeting resistance.
Draw off fuel as much as possible with extractor unit.
Follow drawing off of fuel on fuel gauge in instrument cluster.
Note:
If the extraction hose meets resistance at an insertion length of approx. 100 cm, a second person must press gently against the rubber hose of the
filler pipe.
Only for US cars with N51 engines (metal filler pipe)!

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 454
The extraction hose is correctly positioned in the tank at an insertion length of approx. 120 cm.
Important!
Watch out for escaping fuel when withdrawing the extraction hose from the filler pipe.
Drawing off residual fuel quantity:
Drawing off residual fuel amount is not included in the time value of this operation.
Important!
Ensure car interior is adequately ventilated.
Catch dripping fuel in a suitable container.
Remove left sensor unit See: Fuel Gauge Sender/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Fuel Gauge Sensor (Petrol/Gasoline, Left).
Remove right sensor unit.
Draw off residual fuel quantity through service openings.
Note:
Only for US cars with N51 engines!
Fuel filling:
Insert special tool 16 1 080 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 080 Hose Guide into filler neck.
Special tool 16 1 080 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 080 Hose Guide has two different diameters for petrol/gasoline and diesel vehicles!
Slide extraction hose of extractor unit, approx. 40 cm into fuel filler pipe.
Fill fuel from suction extractor unit.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 455
Drawing off after fault in suction jet pump:
Draw off right half of tank completely through fuel filler pipe.
Remove cap from left service opening.
Insert extraction hose through service opening in tank, fuel (also residual quantity) can be drawn off.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 456
Fuel Tank: Removal and Replacement
Removing and Installing/Replacing Fuel Tank (Petrol/Gasoline)

16 11 030 - Removing and installing or replacing fuel tank (petrol/gasoline)
Recycling
Important!
After installation of fuel tank/prior to first engine start-up:
- Check ground connection at fuel filler neck to body for continuity. If necessary, clean contact surface between body and fuel filler pipe screw
connection.
- Check transfer function of suction jet pump See: Fuel Pump/Testing and Inspection.

- Draw off fuel from fuel tank See: Procedures
- Remove guide tube for handbrake cables See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and
Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Guide Tube for Handbrake Cables
- Remove right wheel arch trim See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair
- Remove rear left and right underbody panelling See: Body and Frame/Splash Guard/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing
Left or Right Underbody Cover
- Remove left and right underbody cover See: Body and Frame/Splash Guard/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Left or
Right Underbody Panelling
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 457
Release screws (1) and remove cover (2) from left and right sides of fuel tank.
Left sensor unit:

Press grey ring (2) towards sensor unit and pull out fuel feed line (3).
USA national version:

Unlock and detach vent lines (2).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 458
ECE national version:
Right sensor unit:

Unlock quick-release fastener and detach vent line (2).
Installation:
Make sure quick-release fasteners engage correctly.
Important!
There may still be residual amounts of fuel in the tank.
Release hose clamp (1) and detach fuel filler hose from fuel filler pipe.
If necessary, draw off residual amount of fuel via filler hose.
Installation:
Tightening torque 16 12 1AZ See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Fuel Delivery.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 459
Unlock quick-release fastener (1) and detach vent line (2).

Detach vent line (2) from holder (3).
Heavily support the fuel tank.
Unfasten nut.
Installation:
Replace self-locking nut.
Tightening torque, 16 11 1AZ See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Fuel Tank and Mounting Parts.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 460
Release screws for tightening straps on left and right and remove tightening straps.
Carefully lower fuel tank.
Important!
Carefully feed the vent line through the body when lowering the fuel tank.
Installation:
Tightening torque 16 11 2AZ See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Fuel Tank and Mounting Parts.
Installation Note:
Note rubber mount with spacer bush.
Wide collar on spacer bush points to screw head.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 461
The following components must be modified when the fuel tank is replaced:
- Modify vent line (1)
- Modify right sensor unit(2)
- Modify left sensor unit See: Fuel Gauge Sender/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Fuel Gauge Sensor (Petrol/Gasoline,
Left)(3)
Replacing Clamping Bands for Fuel Tank
16 11 350 - Replacing clamping bands for fuel tank

- Partially detach rear underbody panelling See: Body and Frame/Splash Guard/Service and Repair/Removing and Installing/Replacing Left or
Right Underbody Panelling
Important!
Secure fuel tank against slipping and falling out.
Heavily support the fuel tank.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 462
Release screws (1) and remove clamping band.
Installation:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 463
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Fuel Filler Pipe
16 11 060 - Removing and installing or replacing fuel filler pipe
Recycling
Important!
After installation of fuel tank/prior to first engine start-up:
connection.

- Draw off fuel from fuel tank See: Service and Repair/Procedures
- Remove rear right wheel arch trim See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair
- Lower rear axle
Unhook retaining strap (1) from tank flap.

Open cap and set to one side.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 464
Important!
Unfasten hose clip (1).
Detach fuel filler hose from fuel filler pipe.
Installation:
Replace hose clip.
Unlock quick-release fastener (1) and detach vent hose (2).

Unscrew nut (3).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 465
Unscrew nuts (1).
Installation:
Withdraw fuel filler pipe (2) completely out of rubber gaiter at wheel arch and feed out.
Installation:
Make sure rubber gaiter is correctly seated.
Installation:
Clean contact surface on body and grounding lead on fuel filler pipe.
Ground connection must be guaranteed.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 466
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair
Replacing Rubber Sleeve Between Fuel Filler Pipe and Fuel Tank
16 11 071 - Replacing rubber sleeve between fuel filler pipe and fuel tank
Recycling
Important!
connection.

Important!
If necessary, draw off residual amount of fuel via filler hose.
Loosen hose clamps (1).
Detach rubber sleeve first from fuel filler pipe and then from fuel tank.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 467
Installation:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 468
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Fuel Gauge Sensor (Petrol/Gasoline, Left)
16 12 001 - Removing and installing or replacing fuel gauge sensor (petrol/gasoline, left)

Recycling
Important!

- Remove right sensor unit See: Removing and Installing/Replacing Fuel Gauge Sensor (Petrol/Gasoline, Right)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 469
Press grey ring (2) towards sensor unit and pull out fuel feed line (3) straight.
Important!
Do not use any tools to release the fuel feed line.
After installing fuel feed line, carry out tensile test and leak test.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 470
Installation:
Procedure for tightening screw cap, see next work step.
Important!
Fit screw cap without using a tool and tighten hand-tight.
Then tighten screw cap with special tool 16 1 020 See: Tools and Equipment/16 1 020 Pin Wrench until notch (1) points to marking (2).
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 471
Installation:
Installation:
Make sure when pulling through the hose pack that the tank ventilation system in the tank tunnel is not damaged.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 472
Note:
Remove sensor unit (1) and hose pack (2) with auxiliary cable to left.
Installation:
When replacing the sensor unit, modify the end of the auxiliary lead to the new hose pack and carefully pull in through the tank.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 473
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Fuel Gauge Sensor (Petrol/Gasoline, Right)
16 12 000 - Removing and installing or replacing fuel gauge sensor (petrol/gasoline, right)
Recycling
Important!
- Check transfer function of suction jet pump See: Fuel Pump/Testing and Inspection

- Remove fuel pump See: Fuel Pump/Service and Repair
Carefully unlock tabs (1) and pull off fuel level sensor upwards in direction of arrow.
Disengage line (2) from holders.
Unlock plug connection (3) and detach from service cap.
Installation:
Fuel level sensor and connector must audibly snap into place!
Important!
Risk of damage:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 474
Carefully feed cable out of cable guide.
Do not kink cable.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 475
Fuel Tank Vent: Service and Repair
13 90 500 - Replacing tank venting valve (S65)

- Remove intake air manifold
Note:
The tank venting valve is fitted under the intake air manifold.

Unlock hose on tank venting valve and disconnect.
Release clamp, detach hose.
Release bolt on bracket.
Remove tank venting valve.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 476
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
Replacing Idle Actuator
13 41 550 - Replacing idle actuator (S65)

- Check stored fault messages
- Partially disconnect engine wiring harness See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Replacing Wiring Harness Section for Engine, raise cable duct.
- Remove tank venting valve See: Fuel Tank/Fuel Tank Vent/Service and Repair
Release air intake hose (1).

Release idle air hose (2).
Replace clamps.
Unlock plug connection and disconnect.

Carefully lever idle actuator out of holder.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 477
Assemble engine.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 478
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Throttle Valve Actuating Motor
13 62 540 - Removing and installing/replacing throttle valve actuating motor (S65)

- Partially remove engine wiring harness See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Replacing Wiring Harness Section for Engine
Note:
Illustration shows and description refers to the left throttle valve servomotor. The procedure is identical for the right intake duct.
Remove thrust rod (1).
Release screws.
Remove throttle valve servomotor (2).
Important!
After performing work on the throttle valve system (throttle valve assembly, servomotor, Hall sensor), it is absolutely essential to carry out a
throttle valve actuator system test with the BMW diagnosis system!
Function selection:
- Complete vehicle
- Drive
- Engine electronics
- Air supply
- Throttle valves
- Throttle valve actuator
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 479
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 480
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair
13 41 100 - Removing and installing/replacing supplementary air line (S65)

- Partially disconnect and raise engine wiring harness See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Replacing Wiring Harness Section for Engine
- Unclip holders for supplementary wiring harness
Remove idle air hose (2).

Replace clamps.
Lever idle actuator out of holder.
Release screws, detach idle air line.

Remove intake manifold pressure sensor See: Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Turbo Boost Sensor/Service and Repair on
bank 2.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 481
Before installing, check O-rings on unions and apply a light coating of grease.
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 482
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Procedures
61 13 ... - DME master relay connector
Unlock locking flap (1) of corresponding cable.
With special tool 61 1 136 or 61 1 137 (ejector), press back arrester hook (2) of appropriate contact and pull out cable.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 483
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Removal and Replacement
12 63 520 - Replacing DME master relay (S65)

- Open electronics box, refer to Removing control unit See: Computers and Control Systems/Engine Control Module/Service and
Repair/Replacing Control Unit (DME)
Remove DME master relay (1).
Notes on troubleshooting:
If the starter motor cranks the engine during the starting sequence but the engine fails to fire, then:
1. Check engine fuses
2. If the fuses have blown, replace them completely with the fuse holder
3. Find out why fuses have blown
Continue troubleshooting as per DIS instructions.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 484
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Left Hall Sensor
13 54 544 - Removing and installing/replacing left Hall sensor (S65)

Unlock and disconnect plug-in contact in wiring harness (not on sensor).

Release screws and detach Hall sensor towards front.
Installation:
Make sure Hall sensor is installed in correct position.
Important!
Function selection:
- Complete vehicle
- Drive
- Air supply
- Throttle valves
Note:
Check stored fault messages
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 485
Clear fault memory
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 486
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Removing and Installing/Replacing Right Hall Sensor
13 54 544 - Removing and installing/replacing right Hall sensor (S65)

- Remove secondary-air pump See: Emission Control Systems/Air Injection/Air Injection Pump/Service and Repair
- Release and raise cable duct for engine wiring harness; for information, refer to Removing engine wiring harness See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Replacing Wiring Harness Section for Engine
Unlock and disconnect plug-in contact in wiring harness (not on sensor).

Release screws and detach Hall sensor towards front.
Installation:
Make sure Hall sensor is installed in correct position.
Assemble engine.
Important!
Function selection:
- Complete vehicle
- Drive
- Air supply
- Throttle valves
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 487
Note:
Check stored fault messages
Clear fault memory
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 488
Turbo Boost Sensor: Service and Repair
13 62 029 - Replacing suction pressure sensor on air intake manifold (S65)

- Remove secondary-air pump See: Emission Control Systems/Air Injection/Air Injection Pump/Service and Repair
- Release cable duct for engine wiring harness; for information, refer to Removing engine wiring harness See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Replacing Wiring Harness Section for Engine
- Remove idle actuator suction hose
Note:
The installation location for the intake manifold pressure sensor is on the idle air duct at cylinder no. 8.

Release screws and pull suction pressure sensor (2) out of intake air housing.
Tightening torque 13 41 1AZ See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Pressure Sensors (S65).
Installation:
Check sealing ring for damage, replace if necessary.
When installing, coat sealing ring with suitable antiseize agent.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 489
Note:
Assemble engine.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 490
Throttle Body: Procedures
13 54 010 - Performing throttle valve basic setting (S65)
Important!
Idle stops of throttle valve assemblies must not be altered! They have been set at the factory and secured against turning with locking paint.

- Read out fault memory of DME control unit.
- Remove intake air manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair.
Important!
The throttle valve assembly must be replaced if the locking paint is damaged or the idle speed stop screw (1) is twisted!
Plastic caps (2) on idle speed top screws must not be removed!
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 491
Checking throttle valve basic setting:
Gap between stop screw (1) and actuator (2) of throttle valve must be less than 0.05 mm.
To check gap, use a feeler gauge with a thickness of 0.05 mm.
Checking gap:
- Pull pull rod of throttle valve actuator in opening direction of throttle valves.
- Slide feeler gauge (3) between stop screw (1) and actuator (2) of throttle valve.
- Return throttle valves slowly to stops.
When correctly adjusted, feeler gauge will jam between stop screw (1) and actuator (2) of throttle valve.
Perform check on each throttle valve assembly.
Performing throttle valve basic setting:
A basic setting must be performed if the gap is larger than 0.05 mm at one or more throttle valve assemblies.
Note:
To perform correct throttle valve setting, it is necessary to slacken all the screw connections (3) of the actuating lever (2) with the actuating shaft
(1). (Replace nuts).
However, if increased play is ascertained, the corresponding cylinder bank must be reset.
Do not slacken the screw connections of the actuating levers for the long pull rods.
The long pull rods must not be disengaged from the actuating levers for the setting procedure.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 492
To slacken screw connection of actuating lever (1), grip screw (3) and release nut (2). (Replace nuts).
Release screw connections of actuating levers of throttle valve assemblies 1-4 and 5-8.
Adjusting a throttle valve assembly:
Move actuating lever (1) in direction of arrow, i.e. "close throttle valve", until actuator (2) of throttle valve rests without play on stop screw (3).
Important!
Do not exert any pressure!
Tighten down screw connection of actuating lever (1) again to actuating shaft. Observe the following instructions in so doing:
- Use nuts only once.
- When pretightening screw connection (approx. 5 Nm), hold actuating lever (1) of throttle valve in direction of arrow at "close throttle valve".
- Only turn nut and grip screw.
- To screw down, use two open-end wrenches which are to be placed at right angles to actuating shaft.
In this way, no lever action is exerted on the throttle valve mechanism; such torque would impair the quality of adjustment.
- After pretightening actuating lever, actuate throttle valve several times at full load.
Note:
If necessary, carry out adjustment with a second person.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 493
Adjusting throttle valve assemblies 1 - 4 and 5 - 8:
The previously described procedure applies to adjusting/setting throttle valve assemblies 1 - 4 and 5 - 8.
Adjust throttle valve assemblies 1 - 4 and 5 - 8 in sequence.
After successfully completing throttle valve basic setting and checking, tighten down all screw connections of throttle valve levers to specified
torque 13 54 1AZ See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Throttle Valve Actuation (S65).
Note:
After completing adjustment, it is necessary to check the throttle valve basic setting!
If during the checking of one or more throttle valve assemblies excessively large or small play is ascertained, it will be necessary to perform the
throttle valve basic setting again!
Important!
Function selection:
- Complete vehicle
- Drive
- Air supply
- Throttle valves
Note:
Then clear fault memory.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 494
Throttle Body: Removal and Replacement
13 54 045 - Removing and installing/sealing a throttle valve assembly (S65)

- Follow instructions on connecting and disconnecting battery See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Instructions
for Disconnecting and Connecting Battery
- Disconnect battery negative lead See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disconnecting and
Connecting Battery Negative Lead and cover
- Remove all injectors See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair
- Release and raise cable duct for engine wiring harness; to do so, partially remove engine wiring harness See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Replacing Wiring Harness Section for Engine.
- Disengage pull rods of throttle valve actuating motor.
Release all nuts of throttle valve flanges.

Release idle air hose connection.
Lift out throttle valve bank.
Release idle air duct on throttle valve bank.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 495
Release all screw connections on shaft (1).

Grip screws, release nuts only. Replace screws and nuts (3).
Installation:
Actuating lever (2) of throttle valve actuating motor is offset by 180° to throttle valve actuating levers.
Mounting sequence of actuating levers, bank 1

1. Levers for throttle valves
2. Lever from actuator motor
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 496
Installation:
Clean sealing surfaces on cylinder head.
Replace O-rings (1) on cylinder head.
Check adapter sleeves on throttle valves.
Note:
Assemble engine.
Perform basic throttle valve setting See: Procedures
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 497
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
61 04 04 (094)
Footwell module
E70, E71, E81, E82, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93
Introduction
The footwell module (FRM) is an electrical node point in the footwell on the driver's side. The footwell module picks up the signals from the doors
and controls the lighting. The footwell module also controls the adaptive headlights. The footwell module is also the interface to the dashboard.
[system overview ...]
Note: System description of adaptive headlights.

There is a separate system description for the adaptive headlights.
[for further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 63 02 03 007

] See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control/Rear Axle - Stabilizer Bar
The following components supply signals for the footwell module:
- Ride-height sensors
- Reversing light switch
- Brake light switch
- Hazard warning lights switch
- Light switch
- Driver's door switch block
- Door contacts in rear doors
- Door contacts in front doors
- Driver's door lock
Several control units are involved in the lighting: In a stricter sense, the following control unit are involved in the lighting system (in alphabetical
order):
- ACSM / MRS: Crash safety module / multiple-restraint system
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 498
> E81, E82, E87, E90, E91, E92: Multiple restraint system
> E70, E71, E93: (ACSM stands for "Advanced Crash Safety Module", also known as the crash safety module)
The footwell module is connected to the crash safety module / MRS control unit via the K-CAN.
In the event of an accident with corresponding severity, the footwell module automatically switches on the interior light hazard warning lights.
> E92
The crash safety module transmits a message about the status of the front-passenger seat-occupancy detector on the K-CAN.
The belt feeder on the front-passenger side is only actuated if the front-passenger seat is occupied.
- AHM: Trailer module
The trailer module sends a signal indicating whether or not the vehicle is towing a trailer. The trailer module controls the trailer lighting.
When a trailer is being towed, the trailer module automatically deactivates, for example the rear Park Distance Control (PDC) and the rear foglight
on the vehicle.
The automatic parking function is deactivated whenever a trainer is detected. (Automatic parking function: To improve the view of the kerb,
the mirror glass is folded downwards when reverse gear is engaged. This brings the area close to the bottom of the vehicle, i.e. the kerbside,
into view when parking.)
The trailer module (AHM) is connected to the footwell module via the K-CAN.
- DSC: Dynamic Stability Control
When cruise control is in operation, the brake lights are actuated during automatic braking (legal requirement). To this end, a signal must be
sent from the DSC to the accelerator pedal module via the PT-CAN.
- FLA: Main-beam assistant
In accordance with the traffic situation, the main-beam assistant sends a switch-on recommendation or a switch-off recommendation for the
main-beam headlights to the light module or footwell module (FRM). On the basis of this recommendation and various other the input
variables, the footwell module decides whether the main-beam headlights should be switched on or off.
[For further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 63 01 05 140] See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Description and
Operation/Main-beam Assistant
- FRM: Footwell module
The footwell module is connected to the vehicle with three connectors.
Two 51-pin connectors connect the main wiring harness. A further 26-pin connector is provided for the connection to the dashboard.
- FZD: Roof control panel

The roof control panel is responsible for the interior lighting components in the roof area.
The basic variant of the roof control panel does not have its own control unit. The front interior lights and the rear interior lights are actuated by the
footwell module (FRM).
The High variant of the roof control panel has its own control unit: the FZD control unit.
The footwell module is connected to the FZD control unit via the K-CAN.
[For further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 61 02 04 091] See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Console/Description and Operation
- JBE: Junction box electronics
The luggage compartment lights and the glove compartment lighting are connected to the junction box electronics.
[for further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 61 05 04 095] See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse
Block/Description and Operation
- LDM: Longitudinal dynamics management
In conjunction with the LDM, the option "Active Cruise Control" uses the "turn signal" signal from the footwell module to help when
changing lanes. In other words, if a left turn signal is given before overtaking, the distance to the vehicle in front is reduced. The vehicle to
be overtaken is "ignored" more easily. Conversely, when you move back into the right lane, vehicles being driven there will be monitored
more quickly.
[for further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 66 03 04 086] See: Cruise Control/Description and Operation
- RLS / RLSS: Rain-light sensor / rain-light solar sensor
> E81, E82, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93: Rain-light sensor
> E70, E71: Rain-light solar sensor
The rain-light sensor measures the ambient brightness outside the vehicle.
Depending on the ambient lighting conditions, the footwell module will switch the driving lights on or off. To do this, the automatic driving
lights control must be activated (light switch in switch position "A").
- In twilight conditions, the rain-light sensor sends the message "Twilight". The footwell module switches the driving lights on. The
automatic headlight-range adjustment for the dipped-beam headlights is actuated.
- In darkness, the rain-light sensor sends the message "Darkness". The adaptive headlights are then activated when the vehicle is cornering.
- SZL: Steering Column Switch
The switch signals from the turn-signal/main-beam switch are picked up and evaluated by the SZL. The evaluated switch signals are
resistance-encoded and transmitted from the SZL by direct wires to the footwell module.
[For further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 61 07 04 103] See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting and
Horns/Combination Switch/Description and Operation
The following components are controlled:

- Exterior mirrors
- Power window drive
- Headlights
- Rear lights
- Front foglights
- Additional brake light
- Auxiliary turn signal light
- Courtesy lighting, front
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 499
- Courtesy lighting, rear
- Licence-plate light
- 2 stepper motor controllers for the adaptive headlight stepper motors
- 2 belt feeder controllers (E92 only)
Belt feeder controllers (E92 only)
The footwell module (FRM) actuates the two belt feeder controllers for the driver's side and front-passenger side. The belt feeder controllers are
connected to the footwell module via a LIN bus.
The belt feeder controllers actuate the drive of the belt feeder.
The position of the drive is reported back to the belt feeder controller by a Hall sensor in the drive.
The end position of the extended belt feeder is recorded by another Hall sensor. The end position is indicated to the belt feeder controller.
The belt feeder controller transmits both signals to the footwell module (FRM) via the LIN bus. The actuation circuit is located in the footwell
module.
The belt feeder on the front-passenger side is only actuated if the front-passenger seat is occupied.
System functions
The following functions are executed by the footwell module:
- Gateway between LIN bus and K-CAN

- Activation via various signals
- Storing vehicle order
- Other functions
Gateway between LIN bus and K-CAN
The footwell module (FRM) enables communication to take place between the LIN bus and the K-CAN.
The footwell module transfers the messages to the relevant recipient bus.
Components on the LIN bus:
- Special equipment exterior mirrors
- Switch block in driver's door, High variant
- 2 stepper motor controllers for the adaptive headlight stepper motors
- 2 belt feeder controllers (E92 only)
Activation via various signals
The footwell module (FRM) can be woken up via the following signals:
- K-CAN active
- Terminal 15 ON
- Hazard warning switch ON
- Change in state of door contacts
- Anti-theft alarm system alarm
Storing vehicle order
The vehicle order is stored in the footwell module (FRM). For the order to be stored, terminal 15 must be ON and the vehicle must be travelling at a
road speed of less than 5 km/h.
The vehicle order enables the vehicle to be identified. Besides the type code number, the vehicle order contains all important equipment features on
the vehicle.
Other functions
The footwell module (FRM) influences various functions on the vehicle. The following components are controlled by the footwell module:
- Exterior mirrors
- Exterior lighting
- Interior lighting
- Central locking system
- Power windows
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 500
Door mirrors
There are 2 versions of the switch block in the driver's door:

- Switch block in the driver's door, basic variant
The switch block sends its signals directly to the footwell module (FRM).
- Switch block in driver's door, High variant

The switch block is connected to the LIN bus. The requests to adjust the mirror are sent via the LIN bus.
The footwell module (FRM) receives and processes the signals via the LIN bus.
The footwell module scans for requests from the driver's door High switch block every 20 milliseconds.
In sleep mode, the power supply is disconnected. The exterior mirrors cannot be actuated.
The mirror heating is controlled by the footwell module. The corresponding signal is fed via the LIN bus to the electronic evaluation unit in the
mirror.
If a mirror memory is fitted, the footwell module will store the memory position of the mirrors.
Exterior lighting
The lighting functions are integrated into the footwell module (FRM).
These lighting functions are:
- Parking lights
- Main-beam headlights
- Headlight flasher
- Turn signals
- Hazard warning lights
- Brake lights
- Dipped-beam headlights
- Reversing light
- Front foglights
- Rear foglight
- Parking lights
Besides the lighting functions, other exterior lighting functions are also integrated in the footwell module:
- Light monitoring
- Headlight beam throw adjustment
- Emergency operating mode if the footwell module should fail
- Lamp replacement
(important lighting functions are substituted by other lights being actuated in the event of individual lights failing.)
- Follow-me-home lights
- Visual alarm after anti-theft alarm has been triggered
(the visual alarm is given as per encoding with hazard warning lights, turn signals with dipped headlights or turn signals with main-beam
headlights.)
- Actuation of bi-xenon headlamps
- Control of the stepper motor controller for the adaptive headlights
- Turning light
The turning lights are coupled to the adaptive headlights.
All lighting functions except the additional brake light are supplied with a pulse-modulated signal by the footwell module (FRM). This PWM signal
allows constant brightness of exterior lighting.
Interior lighting
On vehicles without roof control panel (FZD), the footwell module actuates the interior lighting in the roof area directly.
All footwell module outputs for interior lighting are pulse-width modulated. This ensures that the brightness of the interior lighting always remains
constant in spite of voltage fluctuations.
With standard equipment, the interior lighting comprises the following components:
- Front interior light
- Luggage compartment lighting
- Glove compartment lighting
- Footwell lighting
The following components can also be installed as special equipment for the interior lights:
- Rear interior light
- Courtesy lighting
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 501
Central locking system
The footwell module evaluates the status of the Hall sensors in the door contacts.
When the vehicle is locked or unlocked with the mechanical key element, the footwell module will recognise this request. The footwell module will
send a message through the K-CAN to the CAS (Comfort Access System).
[for further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 61 01 04 072] See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Keyless Entry/Description and Operation/Central Locking System
Power windows
The footwell module (FRM) and the junction box electronics (JBE) actuate the power window drives.
The relays for the front power window motors are located in the footwell module. The relays for the rear power window drives are located in the
junction box electronics.
Preconditions for activation
The footwell module (FRM) receives a large number of input signals that switch on the interior lighting. The input signals are directly read into the
footwell module or are received via the K-CAN.
The following signals switch the interior lighting ON:

- Interior lighting button pressed
- Door opened
- Vehicle unlocked at driver's door lock cylinder
- Vehicle unlocked with remote control
- Terminal R OFF, if terminal 58g was ON no more than 2 minutes earlier
- Crash signal
- Lock button on remote control pressed when central locking system has been in central double-locking for at least 10 seconds
The interior lighting is switched off under the following conditions:
- Central locking system set to thiefproof mode, all doors and the tailgate closed
- Interior lighting button pressed for longer than 3 seconds
- Terminal 58 ON and terminal R OFF
- Terminal R ON with doors closed
- The vehicle is unlocked with the remote control and no door is opened with the space of 20 seconds
- Terminal R OFF and a car door left open for longer than 1 minute
- "Power Down" via diagnosis
- 8 minutes after terminal R OFF
When terminal R is switched OFF, the footwell module (FRM) will switch the interior lighting off after 8 minutes. To do this, the footwell module
sends the message for consumer shutdown via the K-CAN. The roof control panel (FZD) receives this message and switches off the interior
lighting in the roof area. Interior lights that are switched on directly by the footwell module are also switched off.
The footwell module makes terminal 58 g available via K-CAN or via conventional wiring. Terminal 58 g is pulse-width modulated and has two
brightness levels.
- Brightness level for locating lights
The brightness for the locating lights can be set individually with the rocker switch on the steering-column stalk.
- Brightness level for function lighting
The brightness level for function lighting is not dimmed and is switched on at full intensity.
As soon as the hazard-warning lights switch is pressed, the lighting in the hazard-warning lights switch is switched on at full intensity by the
footwell module. If terminal 58 g is activated, the hazard-warning lights switch will no longer be illuminated with full intensity. Brightness depends
on the setting for the locating lights.
The following information is available for service staff:

- Diagnosis: ---
- Nearly all Car and Key Memory functions are programmed inside the vehicle itself. (please refer to the "Personal profile" section in the
Owner's Handbook: Individual settings for up to 3 remote controls via the display in the instrument cluster or via the Central Information
Display)
Subject to change.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 502
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
61 35 115 - Removing and installing/replacing footwell module
Important!

- Remove footwell side trim panel on A-pillar, left See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removing
and Installing/Replacing Side Trim Panel, Footwell, on A-Pillar, Left

Release nuts (2) and remove footwell module (3).
Replacement:
Carry out vehicle programming/coding See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Vehicle Programming and Coding.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 503
Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Coding Control Module (DME / DDE)
12 14 700 - Coding control module (DME / DDE)
Switch off ignition.
Connect MoDiC or DIS/GT1 Tester.

Switch on ignition.
Select "Coding" program.
For subsequent procedure, follow instructions in MoDiC or DIS/GT1 Tester.
Carry out adjustment of following control units:
- EWS (electronic immobilizer)
- DME (Digital Motor Electronics) or
- DDE (Digital Diesel Electronics)
Refer to "Diagnosis and Coding" service information bulletins on subject of coding.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 504
Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Programming Control Unit (DME / DDE)
12 14 705 - Programming control unit (DME / DDE)
Connect MoDiC or DIS/GT1 Tester.

Switch on ignition.
Select "Programming".
For subsequent procedure, follow instructions in MoDiC or DIS/GT1 Tester.
Carry out adjustment of following control units:
- EWS (electronic immobilizer)
- DME (Digital Motor Electronics) or
- DDE (Digital Diesel Electronics)
Refer to "Diagnosis and Coding" service information bulletins on subject of programming.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 505
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
Notes/Information on Removing and Installing Control Units
12 00 ... - Notes/information on removing and installing control units
Important!
- Disconnecting the vehicle battery will cancel the fault memories of control units. Consequently, before disconnecting the car's battery, always
interrogate the fault memories. Investigate stored faults and, once any faults have been remedied, cancel the fault memory.
- Control unit plugs should only ever be connected and disconnected while the ignition is turned off.
- The removal and installation of components, relays, fuses etc. can cause faults to be stored in fault memories capable of self diagnosis.
Always interrogate the fault memories after completing work on the electrical system.
- Investigate stored faults and, once any faults have been remedied, cancel the fault memory.
- If necessary, initialize power window units
When replacing the DME/DDE control unit, observe the following:

- In each case read out the hardware/software status of the relevant control unit using the BMW diagnosis system.
Comply with the instructions of the DIS diagnosis system on the steps pertaining to coding and programming.
On vehicles with electronic vehicle immobilization, comply with the instructions of the BMW diagnosis system.
- Each control unit is programmed with certain basic values, which serve as mean values. The control unit receives different input values,
depending on engine condition, which are compared with the stored values. The adaptive system compares the input values with the stored
map values. The control commands are routed to the relevant actuators.
- If the DME control unit is without current for a long time (more than one hour), its adaptive system loses the stored values. When a cleared
control unit is restarted or a new control unit is installed, the adaptive system must read in and store the input values of the associated engine
as new basic values itself.
- This procedure could lead to erratic idling and disturbed overrunning of the engine after starting. Depending on the engine it could require
some time before all values are adapted to the engine condition.
- Therefore observe the following procedure before replacing or reinstalling a DME/DDE control unit:
1. If possible before exchanging control unit, run engine up to operating temperature.
2. Exchange control units and run the vehicle at alternating engine speeds.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 506
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
Replacing Control Unit (DME)
12 14 550 - Replacing control unit (DME) (S65)

- Disconnect battery See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disconnecting and Connecting Battery
Negative Lead.
- Remove lower section of microfilter housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Cabin Air Filter/Service and Repair/Removing and
Installing/Replacing Right Lower Microfilter Housing Section on right.
Important!
Follow instructions for removing and installing control units See: Service and Repair
Important!
Replacement:
- Carry out programming/coding See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Vehicle Programming and Coding
Important!
It is absolutely essential to read out the fault memory with the MoDiC or the BMW DIS and to create a fault memory printout.
Unlock fasteners (1) from below and slide upwards approx. 10 mm.
Unlock locks (2) in direction of arrow.
Remove cover (3).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 507

Release grommet (2) from electronics box.
Installation:
Make sure grommet (2) is correctly seated in housing (watertightness).
Unlock control unit (3) and raise slightly.
Unlock plugs (1) using slide in direction of arrow and remove.

Remove control unit (2).
Installation:
Replacement:
Note device identification number and coding.
Note:
Check stored fault message.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 508
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
13 62 511 - Replacing intake air temperature sensor (S65)

Intake air temperature sensor (1) without retaining clip.

Intake air temperature sensor (2) with large ribs for retaining clip (3).
Version 1:
Turn temperature sensor through 45° and remove.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 509
Version 2:
Unlock plug and remove.
Pull off retaining clip (1).
Turn temperature sensor through 45° and remove.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 510
Central Electronics Box: Service and Repair
12 90 ... - Removing and installing/replacing electronics box
Important!
Note:
Follow instructions for removing and installing electronic control units See: Service and Repair

- Read fault memory.
- Disconnect negative battery cable See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disconnecting and
Connecting Battery Negative Lead
- Remove microfilter housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Cabin Air Filter/Service and Repair
- Remove tension strut on spring strut dome See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Strut/Service and Repair on right
Release screws (1).

Slacken nut (2).
Lift out right heater end plate (3).
Installation Note:
Ensure gasket (4) is correctly seated.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 511
Unlock fasteners (1) from below and slide upwards approx. 10 mm.
Unlock locks (2) in direction of arrow.
Remove cover (3).
Lift out plug connection (2), fuse carrier (3) and wiring harness grommet (4) from electronics box (1).
Installation Note:
Make sure wiring harness grommets (4) are correctly seated in electronics box (1).
Unlock DME control unit at holders (1) and raise slightly.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 512
Pull tab (3) in direction of arrow out of housing and disconnect plug connections (2) on DME control unit.
If necessary, press locking tabs (1) in direction of arrow and pull contact carrier (2) out of housing.
If necessary, press locking tab (1) in direction of arrow and pull contact carrier (2) out of housing.
Unlock device holder (2) at holder (1) and remove.

Remove DME control unit (3).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 513
Unlock device holder (2) at holder (1) and remove.
Remove device holder (1) from electronics box.
Release screws (1).

Replacement:
Modify water drain valve (2) and bump stop (3).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 514
Installation Note:
Make sure gasket (1) is correctly seated on electronics box.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 515
Central Electronics Box Fan: Service and Repair
12 90 100 - Replacing fan for electronics box

- Follow instructions for disconnecting and connecting battery See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Instructions
for Disconnecting and Connecting Battery.
- Disconnect battery See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disconnecting and Connecting Battery
Negative Lead ground terminal.
- Detach fuse box in passenger compartment and pull back; to do so, refer to Removing fuse box
Important!
Follow instructions for removing and installing electronic control units See: Service and Repair.
Pull back carpet.

Release lower nut on fuse carrier holder.
Pull holder slightly towards front.
Disconnect plug connections for fan motor (1).

Release screws (2). Remove fan.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 516

Read fault memory.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 517
Data Link Connector: Service and Repair
61 13 ... - Removing and installing/replacing OBD-II socket


- Remove footwell side trim panel on A-pillar, left See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Removing
and Installing/Replacing Side Trim Panel, Footwell, on A-Pillar, Left
Release screws (1).

Remove OBD-II socket (2) from holder (3).
Remove OBD-II socket cover (2) from OBD-II socket (1).

Unlock slide plate (3) with a suitable tool in direction of arrow.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 518
Insert special tool 61 0 315 See: Tools and Equipment/61 0 300 Releasing Tool (Complete Kit) in OBD-II socket (1) in direction of arrow and press
out associated flat spring contact (4). Press remaining flat spring contacts with special tool 61 0 315 See: Tools and Equipment/61 0 300 Releasing
Tool (Complete Kit) out of OBD-II socket (1).
Installation:
Pay attention to pin assignment of OBD-II socket (1).
Make sure flat spring contacts and slide plate (3) are correctly engaged and seated in OBD-II socket (1).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 519
Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Description of Bus Diagnosis

Description Of Bus Diagnosis
Functional description see BMW Technology: TIS -> Document -> SI Technology -> 61 02 03 (015)
Brief description:
The data exchange of the control modules is across various bus systems with different features. These bus systems are interconnected via so-called
gateways. The task of these gateways is to interchange data between the connected bus systems. The bus structure is shown in the adjacent system
circuit diagram.
The individual buses are to assigned to the following functional areas in the vehicle:
- PT-CAN: control modules in the area of drive and chassis
- K-CAN: control modules in the area of body electronics (E65: K-CAN system and K-CAN peripherals)
- F-CAN: control modules in the area of the chassis electronics (not E65)
- Local-CAN: peripheral control modules in the area of power train
- byteflight: airbag control modules (E65, E60)
- MOST: control modules in the area of audio and communication
If faults occur in this communication framework, fault memory entries are created in the control modules involved. Here, a distinction can normally
be made between wire faults and logical faults such as missing messages. It should be borne in mind that a fault cause generally causes a number of
fault memory entries in different control modules.
The following fault causes can lead to bus faults:

- Short circuit of a bus line
- Interruption of a bus line
- Fault in a gateway
- Fault in the transmitter or receiver of a control module
This test module evaluates the fault memory entries as a whole. The evaluation of the combination of existing fault memory entries provides the
most probably fault cause. The analysis is currently restricted to the CAN and byteflight systems (E65, E60).
If there has been an undervoltage situation in the vehicle, bus faults can also (erroneously) be entered. For this reason, before evaluation of the bus
faults, there is a check as to whether an undervoltage fault is stored in more than two control modules. If this is the case, there is no further
evaluation of the bus faults; the fault cause can be found in the area of the power supply.
Deactivation, Excess Temperature
Deactivation, Excess Temperature
If a control module becomes too hot, this control module switches off for up to 10 minutes to protect the individual components against damage.
Furthermore, the entire MOST bus can switch off for 10 minutes. After the control module has cooled down, it regains function!
If the fault "Deactivation, excess temperature" is stored in a MOST control module, the control module concerned and the Radio 2 (or Multi Audio
System Controller or Car Communication Computer) also store the fault. The fault in the Radio 2 (or Car Communication Computer) is evaluated
in the test module.
The Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System Controller or Car Communication Computer) is only displayed if it has switched itself off due to excess
temperature.
Top HiFi amplifier: Detection of excess temperature
The Top HiFi amplifier can only disable its own functions at high temperatures. If the customer is currently listening to music, the following fault
pattern results:
- Sound failure in the audio system.
The Top HiFi amplifier does not make a fault memory entry. The MOST framework remains functional. After the control module has cooled down,
the Top HiFi amplifier regains function!
Save Configuration of MOST Ring

Save MOST Ring Configuration
This function determines the current configuration of the MOST ring, compares it with the vehicle order, and then saves it in the Radio 2 (or Multi
Audio System Controller or Car Communication Computer) control unit.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 520
CAUTION:
- This function may only be run if the ring is closed. This is why the stability of the ring is tested at the start of the test module.
- To save the MOST configuration correctly, the OPPS/OPS must not be connected to the MOST direct access point. If this is the case, remove
the OPPS/OPS from the MOST ring and close the MOST ring with the original MOST direct access point in the vehicle.
Ring-Break Diagnostic
Manual ring fault diagnosis
Ring fault diagnosis
In the case of a ring fault (defect in the MOST ring), the two MOST control modules between which the defect in the ring can be found must
be determined first. This is established using the ring fault diagnosis function. However, in the case of some software versions for the CCC,
this is not possible for technical reasons (information in the test module 'Ring fault diagnosis'). In this case, the only possibility is to
determine the position of the ring fault manually.
Determining the position of the ring fault manually

"Terminal R" must be switched on for the manual ring fault diagnosis.
To determine the position of the ring fault manually, the MOST connectors must be removed from the individual control modules in
succession. If red light can be seen in the connector, the MOST connection, starting from Radio2 (or Multi Audio System controller, Car
Communication Computer) is OK up to this position.
Search for the ring fault between the first control module where no light can be seen and the control module preceding this in the ring.
System Circuit Diagram
The following block diagram provides an overview of the control modules and bus systems deployed in the vehicle.
- JBE (Junction Box Electronics)

- Control module with connection to K-CAN, PT-CAN and diagnosis lead
- CCC (Car Communication Computer) or M-ASK (Multi Audio System Controller) or RAD (Radio)
- Control module with connection to K-CAN and MOST
- DSC (Dynamic Stability Control)

- Control module with connection to F-CAN and PT-CAN
- AFS (Active steering)

- K1... Kn: control modules on the K-CAN
- M1... Mn: Control modules on the MOST
- F1... Fn: Control modules on the F-CAN
- PT1... PTn: Control modules on the PT-CAN

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 521
Information Bus: Description and Operation
Bus Functions
Bus Diagnosis
Diagnosis on CAN-Bus
The CAN (Controller Area Network) bus system is a linear bus system that is characterized by the following features:
- signals are broadcast in both directions
- a message is received by all bus nodes. Each node decides for itself whether to process the message or not.
- new nodes can be added by simple parallel connection
- the bus system forms a multi-master structure
- each node can be master or slave depending on whether it is connected as transmitter or receiver
- the transmission medium is a two-core lead; the cores are designated CAN Low and CAN High.
- Switching off defective control modules
In general, every node can communicate with all other nodes via the bus. An access mechanism controls data exchange on the bus. The main
differences between the K-CAN (body CAN) bus and the PT-CAN (power train CAN) bus are detailed below:
- K-CAN: Data transfer rate around 100 kBits/s. Single-wire operation possible.
- PT-CAN: Data transfer rate around 500 kBits/s. No single-wire operation possible.
Master: the master is the active communicating node, i.e. the one that initiates communication. The master is in control of the bus and controls
communication. It can send messages to the passive communicating nodes (slaves) on the bus network and on request receive messages from them.
Slave: the slave is the passive communicating node. It is instructed to receive and send data.
Multimaster system: a multimaster system is one in which all communication nodes can take on the role of master or slave at a particular time.
Causes
The failure of communication on the CAN-bus may be caused by the following:

- Circuit breaks or short circuits on the CAN Low or CAN High communication leads
- Defective plug connections (contact damage, soiling, corrosion)
- Interference voltages in the vehicle electrical system (caused for instance by defective ignition coils or ground connections)
- Failure of the communication modules in the individual control modules
- Failure of the voltage supply of individual control modules (a battery voltage decreasing gradually when the battery is almost discharged can
also lead to fault code entries as not all control modules switch off simultaneously due to the voltages supply being too low).
Inspection procedure for impedance measurement PT-CAN, F-CAN, Local-CAN
When measuring impedance, it is generally necessary to disconnect the circuit being tested from the power supply beforehand. The vehicle's battery
should therefore be disconnected. Wait about three minutes to allow all capacitors in the system to discharge.
Inspection procedure for resistance test:

- the CAN bus must be disconnected from the power supply
- No other testing equipment must be in use (connected in parallel)
- The measurement is taken between the CAN Low and CAN High leads
- the measurements recorded may differ from the specified levels by a few Ohms
Impedance measurement with matching resistor PT-CAN, F-CAN, Local-CAN
On the Tester, switch to Measurement system -> Multimeter

- Measurement function: Resistance
- Measuring range: automatic
In order to prevent signal reflection, a 120 Ohms resistor is fitted to two CAN bus nodes (at the extremities of the PT-CAN network). The two
terminal resistors are connected in parallel and form a shunt impedance of 60 Ohms. When the power supply is switched off, that shunt impedance
can be measured across the communication leads. In addition, the individual resistors can be tested independently of one another. (Tip for 60 Ohms
measurement: disconnect an easily accessible control module from the bus and then measure the impedance between the CAN Low and CAN High
leads on the connector.)
DC voltage measurement PT-CAN, F-CAN, Local-CAN
Precondition for the measurement: battery connected and ignition on!

- Measurement function: Voltage
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 522
- Measurement type: =
In order to establish whether the CAN Low or CAN High lead is defective, you can measure the CAN Low (CAN High) voltage to ground.
CAN Low to ground: voltage approx. 2.4 V
CAN High to ground: voltage approx. 2.6 V
These values are approximate values and can vary by a few hundred mV depending on the bus load.
Oscilloscope measurement PT-CAN, F-CAN, Local-CAN
On the Tester, switch to Measurement system -> Oscilloscope setting

- Measuring range: +/- 5 V
- Frequency range: 1 kHz
In order to obtain a clear idea of whether the CAN bus is functioning properly, it is very useful to be able to observe activity on the bus. What is
important here is not to analyze the actual data being transmitted but simply to be able to see that the CAN bus is operating. The oscilloscope test
can state that, "the CAN bus is probably operating without faults".
If the oscilloscope is used to measure the voltage differential between the CAN Low and CAN High ground leads, a square wave signal with the
voltage limits U(min) = 1.5 V and U(max) = 2.5 V is obtained.
If the oscilloscope is used to measure the voltage differential between the CAN High and CAN Low ground leads, a square wave signal with the
voltage limits U(min) = 2.5 V and U(max) = 3.5 V is obtained.
Resistance test K-CAN
No defined resistance test can be carried out at the K-CAN data bus, as the resistance varies depending on the internal switching logic of the control
modules!
Measuring K-CAN DC Voltage

- Measurement function: Voltage
- Measuring range: +/- 10 V
In order to establish whether the CAN Low or CAN High lead is defective, you can measure the CAN Low (CAN High) voltage to ground.
CAN Low to ground: voltage approx. 4.8 V
CAN High to ground: voltage approx. 0.2 V
Oscilloscope measurement K-CAN
On the Tester, switch to Measurement system -> Oscilloscope setting

- Frequency range: 1 kHz
In order to obtain a clear idea of whether the CAN bus is functioning properly,it is very useful to be able to observe activity on the bus. What is
important here is not to analyze the actual data being transmitted but simply to be able to see that the CAN bus is operating. The oscilloscope test
can state that, "the CAN bus is probably operating without faults".
If the oscilloscope is used to measure the voltage differential between the CAN Low and CAN High ground leads, a square wave signal with the
voltage limits U(min) = 1 V and U(max) = 5 V is obtained.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 523
If the oscilloscope is used to measure the voltage differential between the CAN High and CAN Low ground leads, a square wave signal with the
voltage limits U(min) = 0 V and U(max) = 4 V is obtained.
CAN bus without function
If the K-CAN or PT-CAN data bus indicate no function, it is likely that a short circuit has occurred on the CAN Low and/or CAN High lead, or that
a control module is defective. In order to localize the cause of the fault, it makes sense to use the following procedure:
- Disconnect one CAN-bus node after the other until the unit causing the fault (= control module x) is found
- Check the lines to control module x for short circuits
- If possible, check control module x
However, this procedure only leads to success if a tap line from a control module to the CAN bus has a short circuit. If a CAN bus lead itself has a
short circuit, the wiring harness must be checked.
Diagnosis
Two different bus faults can be entered in the CAN bus control modules:
- CAN communication fault
- CAN wire fault
The communication fault provides an overview of the control modules that have failed on the CAN bus, i.e. were no longer able to communicate.
The "CAN communication fault" can only be read out if the fault is currently not present. If the fault is currently present, it is no longer possible to
communicate with the control module. This means that the fault memory cannot be read, either!
Physical wire fault can be detected by the use of fault-tolerant CAN transceivers. However, at the moment there are only fault-tolerant transceivers
for the K-CAN data bus. This means that only control modules that are connected to the K-CAN data bus can have made the fault memory entry
"CAN wire fault" The CAN transceiver is also unable to distinguish between the individual fault categories listed below. If the bus fault "CAN wire
fault" is entered in a control module, this can mean:
- Break in wiring CAN High
- Break in wiring CAN Low
- short circuit CAN High to ground or positive
- Short circuit CAN Low to ground or positive
- Short circuit CAN High to CAN Low
Break in wiring (single-wire operation): each control module contains a separate bus termination. This means that, even in the case of a break in
wiring, the voltage level can be maintained across the entire K-CAN network. The consequence of this is that a transmitting control module does
not detect this fault and continues to work in two-wire operation. However, if a control module transmits a message across the break, the receiving
control module only detects activity on the undamaged bus line. The receiving control module thus detects single-wire operation and sets the fault
"CAN wire fault". If different control modules receive messages across the break, a number of control modules can have made this fault memory
entry in single-wire operation!
Short circuit: if there is a short circuit in the system, all K-CAN control modules must have entered the fault "CAN wire fault". In order to localize
the short circuit, follow the procedure for "CAN bus without function".
MOST bus
MOST Bus
The MOST (Media Oriented Systems Transport) network uses a ring bus to enable data communication between the various control modules.
Data transmission is by means of fibre-optic cable.
Data transmission on the ring bus takes place in one direction only.
On the MOST ring, messages can only be transmitted provided the bus ring is complete and fully functional. If, for example, the power supply or
the diode of a control module is defective, it is no longer possible to communicate with the control modules on the MOST bus. An exception is
the gateway control module of the head unit (Rad2, CHAMP, M-ASK, CCC or following). The control module is connected both to the MOST
data bus and the K-CAN.
Head unit
The head unit is the interface between the data buses MOST and K-CAN. For the rest of troubleshooting (read fault memory, etc.), the
associated control modules must be selected at the BMW diagnosis system.
One of the following head units is fitted in the vehicle.
- Radio 2, (RAD2, RAD2 gateway)
- Central Head Unit and Multimedia Platform, (CHAMP-BO, CHAMP-GW)
- Multi Audio System controller, (M-ASK-BO, M-ASK-GW, M-ASK-NAV)
- Car Communication Computer, (CCC-ANT, CCC-ASK, CCC-A, CCC-BO, CCC-GW)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 524
Distinction between the head units

In comparison with the M-ASK and CHAMP, the CCC has two slots at the front. This external characteristic can be used to
distinguish the CCC and M-ASK.
Deactivation, excess temperature

If a control module becomes too hot, this control module switches OFF for up to 10 minutes. Furthermore, the entire MOST bus can switch
off for 10 minutes. After the control module has cooled down, it is functional once again!
If the fault "Cutoff excess temperature" is stored in a MOST control module, the control module concerned and the head unit store the fault.
This means there are two possibilities:
- Only the head unit has stored the fault: Then this control module has switched off due to excess temperature.
- The head unit and other MOST control modules have stored the fault: Then only the other MOST control modules have switched off
due to excess temperature. In addition, the head unit can have switched itself off.
Diagnosis
At the function selection (Body, Bus Functions, MOST functions), other test modules for analysis of the MOST control modules or MOST
bus can be selected.
Sequence of Control Modules In MOST Ring
MOST Bus: Control Module Sequence
Transmission direction and control module sequence in the MOST ring
The MOST (Media Oriented Systems Transport) network uses a ring bus for data communication between the various control modules. Signal
transmission is by means of fiber-optic cable. Data transmission on the ring bus takes place in one direction only. On the MOST ring, messages can
only be transmitted provided the bus ring is complete and fully functional. Here, the transfer of messages starts and ends at the Radio 2 (or Multi
Audio System Controller or Car Communication Computer).
With the corresponding MOST equipment, the ring-shaped connection of the control modules is implemented using an optic-fibre cable connector.
This optic-fibre cable connector is located in the luggage compartment on the left above the wheel. As the optic-fibre cable connector means that
the control modules can be connected differently with one another on replacement and in the plant, there is no fixed control module sequence in the
vehicle. The system circuit diagram thus only shows the maximum MOST equipment, not the right order of control modules. The order of control
modules can, however, be determined automatically or manually.
Automatic determination of the control module sequence
The test module "control module sequence" enables automatic determination of the control module sequence. This automatic determination only
provides the right results if the configuration of the MOST ring is correctly stored in the Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System Controller or Car
Communication Computer).
If the automatic determination returns implausible results, there are two possibilities:
- Determine the control module sequence manually (see below).
- Store the configuration of the MOST ring once again. To do so, switch to the function selection on the diagnosis system. Then call up the test
module at Service functions -> Body -> MOST ring - Save >MOST ring configuration. This procedure may only be run if the MOST ring is
closed. For this reason, check the ring stability first when you call up the test module. Then call up the test module "control module
sequence" once again.
Manual determination of the control module sequence
The order of the control modules in the MOST bus can be determined by a visual check in the vehicle.
- The Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System Controller or Car Communication Computer) is connected to the CAN bus and MOST bus.
- For the order of the other MOST control modules, look at the labeling of the optical cables at the optic-fibre cable connector. The input cable
of the optic-fibre cable connector is the cable labeled with "RAD2"/"MASK"/"CCC". Each input of the connector has a direct optical
connection to the opposite output. This means that the order of the control modules can be determined by means of the following labeling:
- CDC (= CD changer)
- AMP (= Amplifier)
- GVM (= Video Module)
- TEL (= Telephone)
- TCU (= Telematic Control Unit)
- ULF (= Universal Charging and Hands-Free Unit)
- JNAV (= Navigation System Japan)
- SDARS (= satellite tuner (US))
- The output of the optic-fibre cable connector is labeled with "FLASH". This cable leads to the MOST direct access point and then to the
Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System controller or Car Communication Computer). This closes the ring.
Check Stability of MOST Ring
MOST Bus: Checking Ring Stability
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 525
The test module enables a conclusion as to whether the MOST ring is closed or open. It can provide two results:
- The ring is closed at the moment of the check. In this case, the ring is functional (or sporadically interrupted).
- The ring is open at the moment of the check. In this case, the ring is permanently interrupted.
System Analysis of MOST Ring
MOST System Analysis

TIS -> Document -> SI Technology -> SBT Number 61 02 03 015
Brief description
The test program evaluates certain fault memories from all of the MOST control modules. If there are configuration problems, the target
configuration is restored first.
The evaluation of the existing fault code memory entries then provides the most probable fault cause. The results are a maximum of the two most
likely fault causes, for example:
- (* * * *) CDC CD changer
- (* *) TEL telephone
Assessment of the result quality:

- (* * * * *) => high quality
- (*) => low quality
The number of asterisks varies between one and five.

Optical Test
Optical Test On The MOST Bus
The MOST (Media Oriented Systems Transport) network uses a ring bus for data communication between the various control modules. Signal
transmission is by means of fiber-optic cable. Data transmission on the ring bus takes place in one direction only. On the MOST ring, messages can
only be transmitted provided the bus ring is complete and fully functional. If there is a ring fault in the MOST network, the system can only
communicate with the Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System Controller or Car Communication Computer). This is possible because the control module is
directly connected to the K-CAN data bus. There is a transmission and a reception module (transmitter and receiver) as a unit in each MOST
control module for connecting to the MOST bus. The unit has an integrated transmit and receive diode. The optical testing and programming
system can be used to test the transmitter and receiver of a control module.
If there is a ring fault (defect between two control modules), the following fault patterns can occur:
- Power supply of the transmitting control module defective
- Internal control-module fault of the transmitting control module
- Transmitter of the transmitting control module defective
- Power supply of the receiving control module defective
- Internal control-module fault of the receiving control module
- Receiver of the receiving control module defective
- Fiber-optic cable between transmitting control module and receiving control module defective
The above faults can also occur in combination with each other. When there is a ring fault, the first task is to locate the two control modules
between which the ring fault has occurred. This is established using the ring fault diagnosis. In order to be able to identify the fault precisely, ring
fault diagnosis must be followed by a check of the power supply. If the power supply is OK, the defect can only be established using the optical
test. The test program for the optical test on the MOST bus (or ring fault diagnosis, as the case may be) can be found under function selection:
Body, Bus Functions, MOST Functions and Optical Test (or Ring Fault Diagnosis).
Transmission direction in the MOST ring
Messages are transmitted from the Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System Controller Car Communication Computer) towards the CD changer, amplifier,
video module and back to the Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System Controller or Car Communication Computer).
Main functions
Plug-in connections in the MOST ring
In the MOST ring, the sockets (1) and connectors (2) for each of the MOST control modules are different. Only the two-pin fiber-optic cable
connector (3)is the same for all MOST control modules. This means that two adapters are required for the optical test on the MOST bus.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 526
Optical testing and programming system
The optical testing and programming system

- is used for troubleshooting in the optical bus systems
- enables rapid programming of control modules connected on the MOST bus
- acts in the system as a diagnostic head. This means the diagnosis can be run as usual.
The optical testing and programming system (MOST section) has a socket for connection to the MOST adapters.
Calibration
For the optical test of a control module (or fibre-optic cable), the control module (or fibre-optic cable) must be connected to the optical testing and
programming system using an adapter. However, each adapter has a different attenuation value. So that these different attenuation values are taken
into account in the optical test, calibration must be carried out before each optical test. During the calibration, there is also a check as to whether the
adapter is OK. The various calibrations, depending on whether a MOST control module or a fiber-optic cable is being tested, are shown below.
Calibration for the test of the MOST control module:To test a MOST control module, you need the MOST control module cable (A1 =
663122). For calibration, you connect the MOST control module cable (A1) to:
1. MOST plug housing (A4 = 663125),
2. MOST test loop (A3 = 663124),
3. Optical testing and programming system (III).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 527
Calibration for the test of the fibre-optic cable: To test the fibre-optic cable, the MOST wiring harness extension is required (A2 = 663123). For
the calibration, the MOST wiring harness extension (A2) is connected to:
1. Optical testing and programming system (III),

2. MOST test loop (A3 = 663124).
Optical test of control module and fiber-optic cable
For the optical test of a control module (or fibre-optic cable), the control module (or fibre-optic cable) must be connected to the optical testing and
programming system using an adapter. The two adapters required for this test are shown in the following.
Test of the MOST control module:To test a MOST control module, (II) the MOST control module cable is required (A1 = 663122). Procedure for
testing a MOST control module:
1. Disconnect the two-pin fiber-optic cable connector (3) from the control module connector (2)
2. Connect the two-pin fiber-optic cable connector (3) of the MOST control module cable (A1) to the control module connector (2).
3. Connect the other end of the MOST control module cable (A1) with the optical testing and programming system (III).
In order to disconnect the two-pin fiber-optic cable connector (3) from control module connector (2), it might be required to disconnect the control
module connector (2) from the socket (1) first. Then run the operation as described under 1 to 3 and on completion connect control module
connector (2) with socket (1).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 528
Test of fibre-optic cable: To test the fibre-optic cable, the MOST wiring harness extension (A2 = 663123) and plug housing are required (A4 =
663125). Procedure for testing the fiber-optic cable:
1. Disconnect the two-pin fiber-optic cable connector (3) from the control module connector (2)
2. Connect the socket of the MOST wiring harness extension (A2) with the MOST plug housing (A4) and the two-pin fiber-optic cable
connector,
3. Connect the other end of the MOST wiring harness extension (A2) with the optical testing and programming system (III).
In order to disconnect the two-pin fiber-optic cable connector (3) from control module connector (2), it might be required to disconnect the control
module connector (2) from the socket (1) first.
NOTE: To test the fiber-optic cable, the two-pin fiber-optic cable must be disconnected from a MOST control module and connected to the OPPS
device. If, for example, you wish to test the fiber-optic cable between the amplifier and the video module, the fiber-optic cable must be
disconnected from the video module and connected to the OPPS device.
If a fiber-optic cable is disconnected in the MOST ring, a red light flashes at the exit of the fiber-optic cable. The Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System
Controller or the Car Communication Computer) attempt to wake up the MOST bus using the flashing light when the fibre-optic cable has been
disconnected. To test the fiber-optic cable, the two-pin fiber-optic cable must be disconnected from a MOST control module and connected to the
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 529
OPPS device. However, the test of the fiber-optic cable only leads to a correct conclusion if an exit flashes when the fiber-optic cable is
disconnected.
It is namely the case when testing the fiber-optic cable that if, for example, a MOST control module in the MOST ring or a second section of
fiber-optic cable in front of the tested fiber-optic cable in the MOST ring is defective, then the MOST ring cannot be optically closed. This is why
the fault "no flashing light" at the exit of the fiber-optic cable can have the following causes:
- Fiber-optic cable where no light flashing at exit point defective
- There is another interruption in a fiber-optic cable in front of the fiber-optic cable in the MOST ring (where there is no flashing light at the
exit)
- Another MOST control module is defective in front of the fiber-optic cable in the MOST ring (where there is no flashing light at the exit)
In order to localize the cause of the fault, perform the following steps:
Disconnect another fiber-optic cable in front of the fiber-optic cable in the MOST ring (where there is no flashing light at the exit) and check
whether you can see a flashing light at the exit:
- If there is no flashing light, there is another defective point in the MOST ring. Run an optical test on the MOST control module in front of
this fiber-optic cable in the MOST ring.
- If a light flashes, the fiber-optic cable which has no flashing light at its exit is defective.
NOTE: If the display of the light output fluctuates during the test of the fiber-optic cable, it is highly likely that there is another defective point
after the tested fiber-optic cable in the MOST ring. The cause is that the ring is not closed and there is thus no continuous light in the ring, rather
pulsed light (if the MOST ring is interrupted, the Radio 2 (or Multi Audio System Controller or Car Communication Computer) attempts to wake
up the MOST bus using a flashing light)
Ring-Break Diagnostic
MOST Bus: Ring Fault Diagnosis
For the MOST bus, there are intersystem fault memory entries in the control modules. A feature of the system faults is that they can be entered in a
control module although the control module is OK. With the information regarding system faults in all MOST control modules, conclusions can be
drawn about the cause of the fault. The section below covers the system fault "Network wake-up unsuccessful". This fault can be entered in all
MOST control modules.
Fault memory entry: Network wake-up unsuccessful
The fault "Network wake-up unsuccessful" indicates a problem with the optical transmission. Insufficient light or no light is coming through at one
position in the ring. Causes may be:
- Control module without voltage
- Fiber-optic cable defective (e.g. kinked too strongly)
- Transmit diode or receiver diode in a control module defective
- Connector not correctly inserted
A distinction must be made as to whether the MOST ring is permanently or sporadically interrupted. To test, select and run the test module Check
stability of the MOST ring.
If the MOST ring is sporadically interrupted, run the test for light output reduction.
If the MOST ring is permanently interrupted, run the ring fault diagnosis.
Test of light output reduction
In the test program, the light output is automatically lowered for one MOST control module after the other. if you want to run the test for light
output reduction for a special control module manually, then:
1. Switch on loud music.
2. Switch to "Control-module functions" of the special MOST control module (component activation: MOST bus light output reduction) and
this control module reduce the light output (the light output is lowered for 5 seconds and then automatically reset by the control module to
the normal value).
3. If the optical transmission from control module A to its successor (control module B) is OK, slight noise ("crackling") can occur when the
light output (from control module A) is lowered and automatically raised.
4. If the optical transmission from control module A to control module B is not OK, the music goes off for a few seconds. This means that the
defect lies between control module A, where the light output was reduced, and its successor (control module B) in the MOST ring.
Repeat operations 1 to 4 several times, as this method does not provide reliable identification, rather only an indication of a defect. Check the
transmission path at which the music goes off for loose plug-in connections and kinks in the fibre-optic cable wiring harness. If the results of the
visual inspection appear to be in order, the fault can only be accurately located (transmit diode control module A, receiver diode control module B,
fiber-optic cable) using the optical test.
Ring fault diagnosis
In the case of a ring fault (defect in the MOST ring), the two MOST control modules between which the defect in the ring can be found must be
determined first. This is established using the ring fault diagnosis function.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 530
Node position "0"
If the power supply to the MOST control modules is switched off and then on again, this switches the MOST control modules to "ring fault mode":
Each MOST control module simultaneously sends a light signal to the next control module in the ring. In addition, each MOST control module
checks whether it is receiving a light signal at its input. The control module that does not detect a light signal at its input stores the relative node
position 0 in its fault memory. Thus the ring fault is between the control module that has stored the node position 0 and the node that precedes it in
the MOST ring.
Determining the control module with node position "0"
Thus, to locate a ring fault between two control modules, it is only necessary to identify the control module that has stored the node position 0. If
there is a ring fault in the MOST network, the system can only communicate with the Radio 2 (or Car Communication Computer or Multi Audio
System Controller) via diagnosis. This is possible because these three control modules are connected to the K-CAN bus. It is not possible to
communicate with the other control modules because signals are only transmitted in one direction and there is a ring fault. That therefore means
that it is not possible to establish which control module has stored the node position 0. A different mechanism has thus been implemented on the
MOST control modules in order to be able to identify the two control modules between which there is a ring failure:
The control module located in the ring after the control module with node position 0 stores node position 1; the next control module in the ring
stores 2 etc. This enables you to determine the position of the ring fault on the basis of the node position stored in the Radio 2 (or Car
Communication Computer or Multi Audio System Controller). This number can namely be read from the CAN bus. By counting downwards,
backwards starting from the Radio 2 (or Car Communication Computer or Multi Audio System Controller), you can determine the control module
with node position 0.
The ring fault diagnosis is run automatically in the test module. In the test module, the node position stored in the Radio 2 (or Car Communication
Computer or Multi Audio System Controller) control module is specified. Further procedure if the position of the ring fault can not be determined
automatically after determining the node position:
Procedure for locating the position of the ring fault using the node position:
1. Determine the order of the control modules in the ring. (To do so, select the menu item "Order of the control modules in the MOST ring" in
the test module)
2. From the Radio 2 (or Car Communication Computer or Multi Audio System Controller) starting backwards (using the connection scheme for
the MOST ring) count down to the node position. Always subtract one per control module. When node position 0 is reached, the ring fault
then lies between the control module with node position 0 and the control module preceding it in the MOST ring.
3. Then check the power supply of the control module located before the control module with node position 0. If the power supply is OK,
continue with the optical test on the MOST bus.
- Test module for checking power supply:Switch to the function selection on the diagnosis system. The test module for checking the
power supply of the MOST control modules can be selected At Body, Bus Functions, MOST Functions and Switch to the function
selection on the diagnosis system. The test module MOST Control Units Power Supply.
- Test module for optical test:for the optical check of the MOST bus can be selected at Body, Bus Functions, MOST Functions and
Optical Test.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 531
The following block diagram provides an overview of the control modules and bus systems deployed in the vehicle.
- JBE (Junction Box Electronics)

- Control module with connection to K-CAN, PT-CAN and diagnosis lead
- CCC (Car Communication Computer) or M-ASK (Multi Audio System Controller) or RAD (Radio)
- Control module with connection to K-CAN and MOST
- DSC (Dynamic Stability Control)

- AFS (Active steering)

- K1... Kn: control modules on the K-CAN
- M1... Mn: Control modules on the MOST
- F1... Fn: Control modules on the F-CAN
- PT1... PTn: Control modules on the PT-CAN

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 532
Bus Diagnosis
61 02 03 (015)
Bus diagnosis
All models from E60
Introduction
In the vehicles of today, components and control units are networked by means of data buses. Data buses are capable of transmitting messages with
signals.
The connected control units only read off those messages and signals that are of relevance to their operation.
Most buses are CAN buses (CAN: Controller Area Network). There are several CAN buses with different data transmission rates in each car.
For example, the PT-CAN has a fast data transmission rate, the K-CAN a slower data transmission rate.
A fibre-optic cable is used for navigation and entertainment: the MOST bus (MOST = "Media Oriented System Transport")
There is a separate data wire for diagnosis: the diagnosis wire, also known as the "K-wire".
[for more information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 61 03 05 144] See: Bus Structures
The following options are available for locating faults in data buses and in control units:
- Test module for CAN bus diagnosis in the BMW diagnosis system:
"Bus system analysis"
The test module is called up in the DIS (Diagnosis and Information System) as follows: "Function selection" button -> Complete vehicle ->
Body -> Bus functions -> Bus analysis -> System analysis
- Checking the terminating resistances:
Checking the terminating resistances can also be important for bus diagnosis.
- Test module for diagnosis on the MOST buses:
"MOST system analysis"
The test module is called up in the DIS (Diagnosis and Information System) as follows: "Function selection" button -> Complete vehicle ->
Body -> Bus functions -> MOST functions -> MOST system analysis.
These two test modules and the installation points of the terminating resistances are described in detail below.
Bus system analysis
The bus system analysis narrows down the cause of intermittently occurring faults in the area of the data buses and control units.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 533
The test results of bus system analysis state the following possible causes of fault:
- Data bus XY defective
- Gateway XY defective (= interface for data exchange)
- Control unit XY defective
Note: Diagnosis of intermittent faults and permanent faults.

All cases where a data bus or control unit only fails temporarily (i.e. intermittently) are difficult for diagnosis.
In such cases, the entries in the control units' fault memories do not point unambiguously to an intermittent failure of a particular data bus or control
unit.
Intermittent failure of a particular data bus or control unit causes many different fault memory entries in several control units.
If a data bus fails completely and permanently, the affected control units are no longer available for diagnosis. The fault is thus easy to locate.
Note: Path details for the "bus system analysis" test module
The test module is called up in the DIS (Diagnosis and Information System) as follows:
"Function selection" button -> Complete vehicle -> Body -> Bus functions -> Bus analysis -> System analysis
In order to determine the cause of a system fault in the bus system the following prerequisites have been established:
- If a communication fault occurs in the control units of the bus system, then this communication fault is not shown in the fault memory of the
control unit concerned. This also means that no "x" appears before this control unit in the short test.
- The quick-test list contains "real" installed control units and a "virtual" control unit with following names:
- "CAN/byteflight system analysis" on the E65, E66 and on the E60, E61, E63, E64 up to 09/2005
- "CAN system analysis" on the E70, E81, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93 and R56 and on the E60, E61, E63, E64 from 09/2005
In this case, "virtual" means that this is not a real control unit but a wild card for all control units on the CAN bus or byteflight.
- The short test for this "virtual" control unit reads the communication fault from all control units.
- An "x" in front of this "virtual" control unit indicates that the short test has analysed one of the following faults:
- Breaks in the wiring in a bus
- Intermittent fault in control unit or gateway
Functions of bus system analysis
Bus system analysis is a test module that automatically executes the following steps:
Step 1: Identification of engine type
Identifying the engine type is a prerequisite for bus system analysis, since: different engines generate different fault code memory entries for the
same cause of fault.
Step 2: Read fault memories of all control units
Step 3: Check fault memory entries for undervoltage
If the vehicle has suffered an undervoltage, the undervoltage is the most likely cause of the bus failure. Bus system analysis checks whether a fault
memory entry indicating undervoltage is present in at least 2 control units.
If no undervoltage can be detected, continue with step 4.
Step 4: Check how many fault memory entries were found
If at least 1 fault memory entry is present, continue with step 5.
Step 5: Evaluation of fault memory entries and creation of a list of most probable fault causes
Bus system analysis computes the 3 most probable fault causes.

The 3 most probable fault causes are given in a list.
The most probable fault cause is at the top of the list.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 534
Note: The number of stars denotes priority.

The stars in front of a cause of fault indicate how probable the cause of fault is. 5 stars denote the most likely cause of fault.
1 star is allocated to a cause of fault that has very low probability.
Step 6: Selection of the test module
The BMW diagnosis system proposes a separate test plan for each of the 3 most probable fault causes.
Terminating resistors
The installation locations are listed below for the purposes of measuring the terminating resistor values.
> - R56
- F CAN
- Vehicles with Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
1 resistor is in the DSC control unit
1 resistor is in the DSC sensor (under the front-passenger seat)
- PT-CAN
- 1 resistor is in the SZL control unit in the version with steering angle sensor (SZL: steering column switch cluster)
1 resistor is in the EPS control unit (EPS: electro-mechanical power steering)
> - E60, E61, E63, E64

- F CAN
- Vehicles with AS (Active Steering)
1 resistor is in the cumulative steering-angle sensor in the steering box.
1 resistor is in the DSC sensor (under the front passenger seat).
- Vehicles without AS (Active Steering)
1 resistor is in the DSC control unit (DSC: Dynamic Stability Control
1 resistor is in the DSC sensor 2 (under the front-passenger seat; DSC sensor 1 is under the driver's seat).
- PT-CAN
- 1 resistor is in the DSC control unit (DSC: dynamic stability control)
- 1 resistor is in the SGM control unit (safety and gateway module)
From 09/2005, this resistor is in the KGM control unit (body-gateway module)
> - E65, E66

- PT-CAN
- 1 resistor is in the wiring harness at the front on the right spring strut dome.
This resistor can be disconnected from the PT-CAN.
- 1 resistor is in the wiring harness under the back seat.
This resistor cannot be disconnected.
> - E70
- F CAN
- 1 resistor is in the SZL control unit (SZL: steering column switch cluster)
- 1 resistor is in the DSC control unit (DSC: Dynamic Stability Control)
- FlexRay
If the vehicle is equipped with option 2VA "Adaptive Drive", the 4 damper satellites are connected to the VDM control unit via the FlexRay
data bus.
This option (special equipment) comprises 2 systems: Vertical dynamics management (VDM) and active roll stabilization (ARS: sales
designation "Dynamic Drive").
A damper satellite is fitted to each shock absorber.
- Vehicles with "Adaptive Drive"
1 resistor in each damper satellite of the vertical dynamic management system (VDM)
- PT-CAN
- 1 resistor is in the DSC control unit (DSC: Dynamic Stability Control)
- 1 resistor is in the EMF control unit (EMF: electromagnetic parking brake)
> - E81, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 535
- F CAN
Different terminating resistors are used depending on the motorisation:
- Vehicles with engine N4... (basic variant and High equipment)
1 resistor is in the SZL control unit (SZL: steering column switch cluster)
- Vehicles with engine M47, M57, N5... (basic variant and High equipment)
1 resistor is in the DSC control unit (DSC: Dynamic Stability Control)
1 resistor is in the SZL control unit (SZL: steering column switch cluster)
- PT-CAN
Different terminating resistors are used depending on the motorisation:
- Vehicles with engine N4... (basic variant and High equipment)
1 resistor is in the JBE control unit (JBE: junction box electronics)
- Vehicles with engine M47, M57, N5... (basic variant and High equipment)
1 resistor is in the EKP control unit (EKP: controlled fuel pump)
MOST system analysis
The MOST bus has a ring structure. This means that a fault in one control unit can have an effect on the entire system. The cause of a system fault
(= communication fault) in the MOST network is not readily apparent.
The "MOST system analysis" test module (BMW diagnosis system from DIS CD 36) was developed in order to analyse faults in the
communication of MOST control units.
The MOST system analysis has been improved in DIS-CD 38.
Note: Path details for the "MOST system analysis" test module
The test module is called up in the DIS (Diagnosis and Information System) as follows:
"Function selection" button -> Complete vehicle -> Body -> Bus functions -> MOST functions -> MOST system analysis
In order to determine the cause of a system fault in the MOST network, the following prerequisites have been established:
- If a communication fault occurs in MOST control units, then this communication fault is not shown in the fault memory of the control unit
concerned. This also means that no "x" appears before this control unit in the short test.
- In addition to the list of "really" fitted control units in the short test, a "virtual" control unit appears called "MOST system analysis".
In this case, "virtual" means that this is not a real control unit, but a wild card for all MOST control units.
- The short test for the "MOST system analysis" "virtual" control unit reads the communication faults of all the MOST control units.
- An "x" in front of this "MOST system analysis" "virtual" control unit indicates that the short test has analysed one of the following faults:
- No communication with the following control units:
> - R56
CCC: Car Communication Computer
RAD2: radio 2 (Radio Boost)
> - E60, E61, E63, E64
CCC or M-ASK or CHAMP: Car Communication Computer or multi-audio system controller or Central Head unit And Multimedia Platform
> - E65, E66
CD: Control display
> - E70
> - E81, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93
CCC or M-ASK: car communication computer or multi-audio system controller
RAD2: radio 2 (BMW radio "Professional")
- MOST ring break
- Fault in a MOST control unit
Functions of MOST system analysis
The "MOST system analysis" test module follows the following sequence:
Step 1: Read fault code memories of MPM, KGM, PM or JBE

- It first checks whether the communication with the following control units is in order:
> - R56
> - E60, E61, E63, E64 up to 09/2005
MPM: micro-power module
> - E60, E61, E63, E64 from 09/2005
KGM: body gateway module
> - E65, E66
PM: power module
> - E70
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 536
> - E81, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93
- Then the fault memories are read.
The following fault code memory entries are read:
> - R56
Have the auxiliary consumer units been switched off?
> - E60, E61, E63, E64 up to 09/2005
MPM: micro-power module
> - E60, E61, E63, E64 from 09/2005
KGM: body gateway module
> - E65, E66
PM: power module
Is there a break in the connection from the control units to the battery?
Is the battery fully discharged?
> - E70
> - E81, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93
Step 2: Check communication with CD or CCC or CHAMP or M-ASK or RAD2
A check is performed as to whether the communication with the following control units is OK:
> - R56
CCC or RAD2: Car Communication Computer or radio 2 (Radio Boost)
> - E65, E66
CD: Control display
> - E60, E61, E63, E64
> - E70
> - E81, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93
If there is a problem with the communication, the appropriate fault is displayed.
The test module is ended.
If communications with the headset are OK, continue with step 3.
(Headset: In the field of automobiles, the headset is the user interface for systems that are not essential for driving, for example navigation, mobile
telephone or radio. Headset is a collective term for various control units, for example CCC, CHAMP, M-ASK, e.g in MOST system analysis).
Step 3: Check MOST ring
Is the MOST ring closed?

If the MOST ring has been interrupted a fault message is displayed. The test module is ended and reference given to the ring interruption diagnosis.
If the MOST ring is closed, continue with step 4.
Step 4: Check MOST configuration
This step checks whether the fault "MOST-Ring: desired/actual configuration do not coincide" is stored. Depending on the model series concerned,
the fault is stored in the following control units:
> - R56
CCC: Car Communication Computer
RAD2: radio 2 (Radio Boost)
> - E60, E61, E63, E64
> - E70
> - E81, E87, E90, E91, E92, E93
CCC or M-ASK: car communication computer or multi-audio system controller
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 537
The test compares the desired configuration of the MOST bus with the actual configuration.
If the actual configuration differs from the desired configuration then the desired configuration for the control units is stored again in the MOST
network.
If the desired configuration is stored, continue with the 5th step.
Step 5: Analyse fault memory of the MOST control units
The fault memory entries in all MOST control units are evaluated with regard to communication faults. The evaluation of the fault memory entries
present will give the most probable cause of the fault.
At most the 2 most probable causes of the fault (control units) will be given as a result, e.g.:
- CDC CD changer (****)
- TEL Telephone (**)
Evaluation of quality of results:
(*****) stands for high quality (most probable fault)
(*) stands for poor quality
The number of stars varies between one star and five stars.
The necessary procedure is described.

- Diagnosis: ---
Subject to change.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 538
Bus Structures
61 03 05 (144)
Bus structures
All models from E38 and MINI
Introduction
In the vehicles of today, components and control units are networked by means of data buses. Data buses are capable of transmitting messages and
signals.
The connected control units only read off those messages and signals that are of relevance to their operation.
Most buses are CAN buses (CAN: Controller Area Network).

A fibre-optic cable is used for navigation and entertainment: The MOST bus (MOST = "Media Oriented System Transport").
It has its own data wire for diagnosis: the diagnostics cable, also known as the "K-line"
[Overview of BMW data buses ...]
This SI Technology bulletin (SBT) contains system overviews of bus structures for the following model series:
- E38 [system overview ...] (7-Series, manufacturing period from 1994 to 2001)
- E52 [system overview ...] (Z8, manufacturing period from 1999 to 2003)
- E53 [system overview ...] (X5, manufacturing period from 1999 until 2006)
- E60, E61, E63, E64
> - E60, E61, E63, E64 from 03/2007:
> - E60, E61, E63, E64 from 09/2005 until 03/2007: [system overview ...]
> - E60, E61, E63, E64 from 03/2005 until 09/2005: [system overview ...]
> - E60, E61, E63, E64 until 03/2005: [system overview ...]
- E65, E66
> - E65 and E66 from 03/2005: [system overview ...]
> - E65 and E66 from 03/2004 until 03/2005: [system overview ...]
> - E65 and E66 until 03/2004: [system overview ...]
- E70 [system overview ...] (X5, start of series production 2006)
- E83
> - E83 [system overview ...] (X3, start of series production 2004 until 09/2006)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 539
> - E83 from 09/2006 [system overview ...]
- E85, E86
> - E85 (Z4), start of series production 2002 until 01/2006: [system overview ...]
> - E85, E86 from 01/2006: [system overview ...]
- E81, E82, E87 [system overview ...] (1-Series, start of series production 2004)
- E90, E91, E92, E93 [system overview ...] (3-Series, start of series production 2005)
- R50, R52, R53 [system overview ...](MINI and MINI Convertible, start of series production 2001)
- R55, R56 [system overview ...] (start of series production 2006)
This SI Technology bulletin (SBT) also contains a section with frequently asked questions.
Note: Abbreviations for control unit names

In the overviews of bus structures, all diagnosis and programming control units are indicated by abbreviations.
The abbreviations used for the control units are listed in alphabetical order and explained in the SI technology bulleting "abbreviations.
and
[for more information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 00 01 03 035] See: Description and Operation/Abbreviations All/Abbreviations All
Models SBT 00 01 03 (035)
The following control units are numbered:
- Control units that cannot be programmed and cannot be encoded and which do not appear in the quick test.
These control units do not have an abbreviation, just a number.
- Control units with control unit designation from the time before electrical system 2000:
Besides the abbreviation, these control units have a number for entering in the table.
On the history of control unit designations:
Since the start of series production of the E65 (electrical system 2000), the control unit designations have been harmonised. Earlier model
series have varying control unit designations.
For technical reasons associated with the system, these control units have not been renamed.
This is because: These control unit designations appear in the quick test on the BMW diagnosis system.
Buses and control units in the E60, E61, E63, E64
In the E60, the K-CAN S and K-CAN P from the E65, E66 have been combined to form the K-CAN.
This means the E60 has the following buses: byteflight (until 09/2005), K-CAN, MOST, F-CAN, PT-CAN plus a local CAN (for the engine
management system).
The central interface for exchanging data between buses is the safety and gateway module (SGM).
Note: Modifications in the bus structures on the E60, E61, E63, E64 from 03/2007
From March 2007, the bus structures are modified as follows:
- The D-CAN is now also integrated:

D-CAN (diagnosis-on CAN) supersedes the previous diagnosis interface in all parts of the world.
- The GWS is now also integrated:
A new control unit has been integrated on the PT-CAN for selecting the drive position in the automatic transmission.
GWS: Gear selector switch
With the gear selector switch, the automatic transmission is no longer actuated mechanically, but rather electronically.
- The TLC is now also integrated:
A new control unit has been integrated on the PT-CAN for the driver assistance system.
TLC: Track lane control
Track lane control supports the driver by vibrating the steering wheel to warn him if the vehicle unexpectedly drifts off of the regular course,
prompting him to countersteer.
- The LDM and LRR are also integrated:
With the introduction of active cruise control with stop&go function, 2 new control unit are integrated for cruise control:
LDM: Longitudinal dynamics management
LRR: Long range sensor
The control unit for longitudinal dynamics management (LDM control unit) is connected to the PT-CAN.
The long range sensor is connected to the LDM and the close-range sensors by the new sub-bus. The sub-bus is called the sensor CAN (S-CAN).
> E60, E61, E63, E64 from 03/2007: Buses and control units:
From September 2005, the bus structures are modified as follows:
- No byteflight data bus

The SZL control unit is connected to the PT-CAN and no longer to the byteflight.
As before, the SZL control unit is connected to the F-CAN.
Following control units are dropped together with the byteflight:
- SBSL: B-pillar satellite, left
- SBSR: B-pillar satellite, right
- TMBF: Door module, front-passenger
- TMFA: Door module, driver
- ACSM is added.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 540
The crash safety system is controlled by a new control unit:
ACSM: crash safety module
The ACSM control unit is on the K-CAN.
("ACSM" = Advanced Crash Safety Module or Management)
[for further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 65 05 05 138]
- ALBBF and ALBFA are added.
2 new control units for the active backrest width adjustment are added on the PT-CAN.
ALBBF: Active seat back width, front passenger seat
ALBFA: Active seat back width, driver's seat
- CA is added.
A control unit for comfort access is added on the K-CAN.
CA: Comfort Access
[for further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 66 04 04 093] See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Keyless Entry/Description and Operation/Comfort Access
- KGM is added.
As of September 2005, the data interface for the buses is the body-gateway module (KGM). The previous data interface for the buses, the
safety and gateway module (SGM) has been dropped.
The following functions are integrated in the KGM control unit:
- Data interface for buses
- Outside door handle electronics
- Vehicle centre satellite
- micro-power module
- IBS: Intelligent battery sensor
The IBS is connected via the bit-serial data interface (BSD) to the engine control unit. The IBS has been part of the power supply on the
BMW 5-Series since start of series production.
- FLA is added.
A new control unit for the main-beam assistant is added on the K-CAN:
FLA: Main-beam assistant
[for further information, please refer to SI Technology (SBT) 63 01 05 140] See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Description and
Operation/Main-beam Assistant
- For US vehicles: IBOC is added.
For US vehicles, a control unit is added to the MOST for analogue and digital radio reception.
IBOC: Digital tuner US
- For Korea vehicles: KNAV is added.
A control unit for the navigation system is added for vehicle in Korea.
KNAV: Korea navigation system
The KNAV control unit is connected to the MOST.
- A new control unit for the night vision assistant is added on the K-CAN:
NVE: night vision electronics
- MPM dropped.
No micro-power module (MPM) on the K-CAN. The KGM control unit performs the functions of the MPM.
- For US vehicles: RDC is added.
For US vehicles, a new control unit added on the K-CAN for monitoring tyre pressure has been.
RDC: Tyre pressure control
> E60, E61, E63, E64 from 09/2005 until 03/2007: Buses and control units:
From March 2005, the bus structures are modified as follows:
- AHL discontinued:
From March 2005, the AHL control unit (adaptive headlights) is integrated into the light module. The light module is connected to the
K-CAN and the PT-CAN.
- The VTG is now also integrated: For the E60 and E61, an all-wheel drive vehicle is available. The control unit for the xDrive on the E60 and
E61 is known as the VTG: Transfer case.
> E60, E61, E63, E64 from 03/2005 until 09/2005: Buses and control units:
Note: Original version:

Buses and control units on E60, E61 E63, E64 up to 03/2005
To support the workshops, the predecessor version of the bus structures on the E60 are also described below:
> E60, E61, E63, E64 until 03/2005: Buses and control units:
Buses and control units in the E65 and E66
The main buses in the E65 and E66 are called: K-CAN P, K-CAN S, MOST, byteflight, Local CAN, PT-CAN.
Note: Modifications to the bus structures for the E65 and E66 from 03/2005
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 541
From March 2005, the AHL control unit (adaptive headlights) is integrated into the light module. The light module is connected to the K-CAN S
and the PT-CAN.
> E65 and E66 from 03/2005: Buses and control units:
Note: Predecessor version:

Buses and control units on E65, E66 from 03/2004
To support the workshops, a description of the predecessor version of the bus structures on the E65 and E66 is also provided:
The key modification compared to the original version of the bus structures on the E65 and E66 is:
SIM and ZGM have been combined to create the SGM. The SGM is the central data interface for all buses and control units.
(SIM: safety and information module)
(ZGM: central gateway module)
(SGM: safety and gateway module)
> E65 and E66 from 03/2004 to 03/2005: Buses and control units:
Note: Original version:

Buses and control units on E65, E66 up to 03/2004
To support the workshops, the original version of the bus structures on the E65 and E66 is also available:
In the original version, the E65, E66 had the two control units SIM and ZGM.
- SIM: safety and information module
The SIM was the data interface for the control units on the byteflight data bus.
- ZGM: Central gateway module
The ZGM is the central data interface for all buses and control units.
> E65 and E66 up to 03/2004: Buses and control units:
Buses and control units in the E70
The important buses in the E70 are called: K-CAN, MOST, PT-CAN, F-CAN, FlexRay.
FlexRay is a new communication system that offers extremely efficient, real time data transfer between the electrical and mechatronic components
in the vehicle. FlexRay has a data transfer rate of 10 MBit/s.
FlexRay is used for data exchange between the VDM control unit and the shock absorber satellites.
CHAMP: On the US national version, instead of the multi-audio system controller (M-ASK), the Central Headset And Multimedia Platform
(CHAMP) operates as the BMW "Professional" radio. In contrast to M-ASK, CHAMP does not have a navigation system.
> E70: Buses and control units [system overview ...]
Buses and control units in E81, E82, E87
The important buses in the E87 are called: K-CAN, MOST, PT-CAN and F-CAN.
The MOST, the innovation in the bus structure on the E65 and E66, is now also used in the E81, E82, E87.
The central interface for data transmission is the junction box electronics (JBE) in the junction box.
> E81, E82, E87: Buses and control units [system overview ...]
Buses and control units on the E90, E91, E92, E93
The most important buses on the E90, E91, E92, E93 are: K-CAN, MOST, PT-CAN, F-CAN.
The new feature is that the footwell module (FRM) is connected to the PT-CAN. This is because:
- The adaptive headlights are integrated into the footwell module. The adaptive headlights need the high-speed PT-CAN.
- The longitudinal dynamics management sends the signal for the brake light on the PT-CAN.
> E90, E91, E92, E93: Buses and control units: [system overview ...]
Buses and control units on the R50, R52, R53
The most important buses on the R50, R52, R53 are: K-bus, PT-CAN.
The central interface for data transfer is the instrument cluster (KOMBI).
> R50, R52, R53: Buses and control units: [system overview ...]
Buses and control units in the R55, R56
The most important buses on the R55, R56 are: K-CAN, MOST, PT-CAN and F-CAN.
The central interface for data transmission is the junction box electronics (JBE) in the junction box.
> R55, R56: Buses and control units: [system overview ...]

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 542
- Diagnosis:
- Programming: ---
Subject to change.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 543
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing Left Lambda Oxygen Control Sensor
11 78 530 - Replacing left lambda oxygen control sensor (S65)

- 11 7 030
Warning!
Scalding hazard!

- Read out fault memory in Digital Motor Electronics (DME).
- Remove transmission underbody protection.
Pull plug connection (1) from holder (2).

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 544
Remove oxygen control sensor with special tool 11 7 030.
If the oxygen control sensor is reused, apply a thin and even coat of Never Seez Compound (refer to BMW Parts Service) to the thread only.
The part of the oxygen control sensor which projects into the exhaust system branch (sensor ceramic) must not be cleaned or come into contact
with lubricant.
Secure oxygen control sensor with special tool 11 7 030 and a torque wrench (1).
Tightening torque: 11 78 1AZ See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Emissions Control, Control Sensor / Monitor Sensor.
Check function of DME.

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 545
Replacing Left Lambda Oxygen Monitor Sensor
11 78 540 - Replacing left lambda oxygen monitor sensor (S65)

- 11 7 030
Warning!
Scalding hazard!

Remove oxygen monitor sensor with special tool 11 7 030.
Installation Note:
If the oxygen monitor sensor is reused, apply a thin and even coat of Never Seez Compound (refer to BMW Parts Service) to the thread only.
The part of the oxygen monitor sensor which projects into the exhaust system branch (sensor ceramic) must not be cleaned or come into contact
with lubricant.
Secure oxygen monitor sensor with special tool 11 7 030 and a torque wrench (2).
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 546

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 547
Replacing Right Lambda Oxygen Monitor Sensor
11 78 543 - Replacing right lambda oxygen monitor sensor (S65)

- 11 7 030
Warning!
Scalding hazard!

Remove oxygen monitor sensor with special tool 11 7 030.
Installation Note:
If the oxygen monitor sensor is reused, apply a thin and even coat of Never Seez Compound (refer to BMW Parts Service) to the thread only.
The part of the oxygen monitor sensor which projects into the exhaust system branch (sensor ceramic) must not be cleaned or come into contact
with lubricant.
Secure oxygen monitor sensor with special tool 11 7 030 and a torque wrench.
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 548

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 549
Vehicle: Tools and Equipment
00 0 010 Special Tool Board I

00 0 010 Special tool board I
00 0 011 Special Tool Board I Incl. Mounting Fixture, without Film Sheeting
00 0 011 Special tool board I incl. mounting fixture, without film sheeting
00 0 020 Special Tool Board II Complete

00 0 020 Special tool board II complete
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 550
00 0 030 Special Tool Board III Complete

00 0 030 Special tool board III complete
00 0 040 Special Tool Board IV Complete

00 0 040 Special tool board IV complete
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 551
00 0 050 Caption Board - "Special Tools"

00 0 050 Caption board: "SPECIAL TOOLS"
00 0 051 Film Sheet, German

00 0 051 Film sheet, German
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 552
00 0 052 Film Sheet, English

00 0 052 Film sheet, English
00 0 053 Film Sheet, French

00 0 053 Film sheet, French
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 553
00 0 054 Film Sheet, Dutch

00 0 054 Film sheet, Dutch
00 0 055 Film Sheet, Italian

00 0 055 Film sheet, Italian
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 554
00 0 056 Film Sheet, Spanish

00 0 056 Film sheet, Spanish
00 0 059 Caption Board without Film

00 0 059 Caption board without film
00 0 060 Special Tool Board V Complete

00 0 060 Special tool board V complete
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 555
00 0 070 Special Tool Cabinet, Length 6 m

00 0 070 Special tool cabinet, length 6 m
00 0 080 Folding Index

00 0 080 Folding index
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 556
00 0 110 Cardboard Box

00 0 110 Cardboard box
Minimum set: Measuring and testing equipment
00 0 120 Cardboard Box (Set) for Cable Cabinet

00 0 120 Cardboard box (set) for cable cabinet
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 557
00 0 130 Special Tool Board VI Complete

00 0 130 Special tool board VI complete
00 0 140 Supplementary Hook Set

00 0 140 Supplementary hook set
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 558
00 0 150 Special Tool Cabinet

00 0 150 Special tool cabinet
00 0 152 Shelf
00 0 152 Shelf
00 0 153 Wide-Groove Mat (2 Mats)

00 0 153 Wide-groove mat (2 mats)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 559
00 0 154 Drawer Unit with 5 Drawers, Lockable

00 0 154 Drawer unit with 5 drawers, lockable
00 0 155 Rear Panel

00 0 155 Rear panel
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 560
00 0 158 Lockable Roller Shutter (2)

00 0 158 Lockable roller shutter (2)
00 0 170 Parts Cabinet

00 0 170 Parts cabinet
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 561
00 0 180 Cable Cabinet II, Complete

00 0 180 Cable cabinet II, complete
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 562
00 0 190 Cable Cabinet I, Complete

00 0 190 Cable cabinet I, complete
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 563
00 0 210 Conversion Kit

00 0 210 Conversion kit
00 0 220 Special Tool Cabinet, Length 2 m

00 0 220 Special tool cabinet, length 2 m
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 564
00 0 230 Large Board (2x1 m) with Set of Castors

00 0 230 Large board (2x1 m) with set of castors
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 565
00 0 240 Small Moving Special Tool Board without Films

00 0 240 Small moving special tool board without films
00 0 250 Shelf
00 0 250 Shelf
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 566
00 0 260 Drawer Block

00 0 260 Drawer block
00 0 270 Rear Panel (2 Pcs.)

00 0 270 Rear panel (2 pcs.)
00 0 280 Film Sheet and Hook Sets From Special Tool Board VII
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 567
00 0 280 Film sheet and hook sets from special tool board VII
00 0 333 Supplementary Film / Hook Set

00 0 333 Supplementary film / hook set

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 568






00 0 342 Supplementary Film and Hook Set

00 0 342 Supplementary film and hook set
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 569
00 0 343 Film and Hook Set

00 0 343 Film and hook set





00 0 354 Films/Hook Set E90

00 0 354 Films/hook set E90
00 0 355 Films/Hook Set

00 0 355 Films/hook set
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 570



00 0 359 Supplementary Foils + Hooks for 24 2 354 & 24 4 166

00 0 359 Supplementary foils + hooks for 24 2 354 & 24 4 166
00 0 362 Supplementary Film/Hook Set For S65

00 0 362 Supplementary film/hook set for S65
00 0 415 Film Set 1 + 2 for E87

00 0 415 Film set 1 + 2 for E87
00 0 416 Film Set Cable Cabinet 1 for E90

00 0 416 Film set cable cabinet 1 for E90
00 0 418 Film Set Cable Cabinet 2

00 0 418 Film set cable cabinet 2
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 571
00 0 450 Decade Number

00 0 450 Decade number
00 1 000 Special Tool Cabinet, Length 6 m, Complete Current Range of Equipment.

00 1 000 Special tool cabinet, length 6 m, complete current range of equipment.
00 1 010 Special Tool Cabinet, Length 4 m and 2 m, Complete Current Range of Equipment.
00 1 010 Special tool cabinet, length 4 m and 2 m, complete current range of equipment.
00 1 140 E87 Film and Hook Set

00 1 140 E87 film and hook set
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 572
00 1 300 Tool Cabinet, USA Version, Complete

00 1 300 Tool cabinet, USA version, complete
00 1 310 Tool Boards, Complete, USA Version

00 1 310 Tool boards, complete, USA version
00 1 320 Film Set, Complete, USA Version

00 1 320 Film set, complete, USA version
00 1 331 Film No. 10 USA Version

00 1 331 Film no. 10 USA version

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 573

00 1 340 Hook Set, Complete, for 00 1 300, USA Version

00 1 340 Hook set, complete, for 00 1 300, USA version
00 1 351 Hook Set for Film No. 10 USA Version

00 1 351 Hook set for film no. 10 USA version
00 1 352 Hook Set for Film No. 11 USA Version

00 1 352 Hook set for film no. 11 USA version
00 1 490 Assembly Stand

00 1 490 Assembly stand
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 574
00 2 030 Universal Hydro-Lifter Basic Unit

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 575
00 2 030 Universal hydro-lifter basic unit
00 2 040 Basic Take-Up Fixture

00 2 040 Basic take-up fixture
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 576
00 2 080 Hand Pump

00 2 080 Hand pump
00 2 210 Exhaust Pipe Cutter

00 2 210 Exhaust pipe cutter
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 577
00 2 220 Exhaust Pipe Cutter

00 2 220 Exhaust pipe cutter
00 2 250 Special Pliers for Cable Reconditioning

00 2 250 Special pliers for cable reconditioning
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 578
00 2 261 Adapter (2 x)
00 2 261 Adapter (2 x)
00 2 262 Tensioning Strap (2 x)

00 2 262 Tensioning strap (2 x)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 579
00 2 327 Engine Support Plates

00 2 327 Engine support plates
00 2 520 Torx Sockets E10, E12, E14

00 2 520 Torx sockets E10, E12, E14
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 580
00 2 550 Depth Gauge

00 2 550 Depth gauge
00 3 070 AWL
00 3 070 AWL
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 581
00 4 420 Charger
00 4 420 Charger
00 5 010 Universal Puller

00 5 010 Universal puller
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 582
00 5 030 Special Pliers for Seat Belt Limiter

00 5 030 Special pliers for seat belt limiter
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 583
00 5 040 Riveting Tool

00 5 040 Riveting tool
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 584
00 5 101 Film 1, Board I

00 5 101 Film 1, board I


00 5 104 Film 4, Board II

00 5 104 Film 4, board II



BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 585

00 5 109 Film 9, Board 3

00 5 109 Film 9, board 3
00 5 111 Film 10 (A/B/C 19/20)

00 5 111 Film 10 (A/B/C 19/20)
00 5 112 Film 11 (A/B/C 21/22)

00 5 112 Film 11 (A/B/C 21/22)
00 5 113 Film 12 (A/B/C 23/24)

00 5 113 Film 12 (A/B/C 23/24)
00 5 201 Hook Set

00 5 201 Hook set
00 5 202 Hook Set

00 5 202 Hook set
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 586
00 5 203 Hook Set

00 5 203 Hook set
00 5 204 Hook Set

00 5 204 Hook set
00 5 205 Hook Set

00 5 205 Hook set
00 5 206 Hook Set

00 5 206 Hook set
00 5 207 Hook Set

00 5 207 Hook set
00 5 208 Hook Set

00 5 208 Hook set
00 5 209 Hook Set

00 5 209 Hook set
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 587
00 5 211 Hook Set for Film 10

00 5 211 Hook set for film 10
00 5 212 Hook Set

00 5 212 Hook set
00 5 213 Hook Set

00 5 213 Hook set
00 5 301 Film
00 5 301 Film
00 5 302 Film
00 5 302 Film
00 5 351 Hook Set

00 5 351 Hook set
00 5 352 Hook Set

00 5 352 Hook set
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 588
00 5 451 Stock Issue Film 1

00 5 451 Stock issue film 1




00 5 471 Hook Set for Stock Issue Film 1

00 5 471 Hook set for stock issue film 1

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 589



00 5 499 Supplementary Hook Set

00 5 499 Supplementary hook set
00 5 500 Handle for Drifts

00 5 500 Handle for drifts
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 590
00 6 000 Fixture
00 6 000 Fixture
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 591
00 7 500 Universal Puller Kukko 17/K

00 7 500 Universal puller Kukko 17/K
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 592
00 8 600 Hook Set

00 8 600 Hook set
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 593
00 8 660 Magnet
00 8 660 Magnet
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 594
00 8 690 Washers and Screws

00 8 690 Washers and screws
00 9 010 Torx E18 Socket

00 9 010 Torx E18 socket
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 595
00 9 110 Circlip Pliers

00 9 110 Circlip pliers
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 596
00 9 120 Torque Angle Measuring Dial

00 9 120 Torque angle measuring dial
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 597
00 9 130 Magnet with 1/2 " Connection

00 9 130 Magnet with 1/2 " connection
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 598
00 9 250 Torque Wrench with Flexible Extension

00 9 250 Torque wrench with flexible extension
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 599
00 9 290 Riveting Tool

00 9 290 Riveting tool
00 9 310 Assembly Wedges (Set in Plastic Case)

00 9 310 Assembly wedges (set in plastic case)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 600
00 9 340 Disassembly Aid (2 Pieces)

00 9 340 Disassembly aid (2 pieces)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 601
00 9 450 Torque Wrench

00 9 450 Torque wrench
61 0 021 Fuse Link FF 3.15 A / 500 V

61 0 021 Fuse link FF 3.15 A / 500 V
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 602
61 0 200 Crimping Set (Basic Tool)

61 0 200 Crimping set (basic tool)
61 0 210 Matrix LSK 8

61 0 210 Matrix LSK 8
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 603
61 0 220 Matrix for SLK 2.8

61 0 220 Matrix for SLK 2.8
61 0 230 Stencil for Contacts "DFK 40" and "MAK 8"

61 0 230 Stencil for contacts "DFK 40" and "MAK 8"
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 604
61 0 300 Releasing Tool (Complete Kit)

61 0 300 Releasing tool (complete kit)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 605
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 606
61 1 100 Releasing Kit

61 1 100 Releasing kit
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 607
61 1 180 Removal Tool

61 1 180 Removal tool
61 1 190 Pliers
61 1 190 Pliers
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 608
61 1 410 Set of DIS Test Prods

61 1 410 Set of DIS test prods
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 609
61 2 250 V-Adapter Lead (Rail Pressure Sensor)

61 2 250 V-adapter lead (rail pressure sensor)
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 610
61 2 440 System Connecting Cable (Country-Specific)

61 2 440 System connecting cable (country-specific)
61 3 140 Adapter Lead, 38-Pin

61 3 140 Adapter lead, 38-pin
61 4 300 Adapter Lead for OBD Socket

61 4 300 Adapter lead for OBD socket
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 611
61 4 320 Crimping Set with Pliers

61 4 320 Crimping set with pliers
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 612
61 4 360 Adapter Cable, 19-Pin (Electric Seat)

61 4 360 Adapter cable, 19-pin (electric seat)
61 4 380 Measuring Box, 105-Pin, Complete

61 4 380 Measuring box, 105-pin, complete
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 613
61 4 390 Measuring Box, 60-Pin

61 4 390 Measuring box, 60-pin
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 614
61 6 100 Angle Measuring Instrument

61 6 100 Angle measuring instrument
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 615
61 6 210 Wiper Arm Puller

61 6 210 Wiper arm puller
61 8 081 Additions to Repair Kit I

61 8 081 Additions to repair kit I
61 8 082 Additions to Repair Kit II

61 8 082 Additions to repair kit II
61 8 083 Additions to Repair Kit III

61 8 083 Additions to repair kit III
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 616
61 9 040 Set of Tools for Repair Kit IV

61 9 040 Set of tools for repair kit IV
61 9 045 Female Die

61 9 045 Female die
72 0 010 Lever
72 0 010 Lever
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 617
72 1 200 Holder
72 1 200 Holder
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 618
Vehicle: Description and Operation
Abbreviations All
Abbreviations All Models SBT 00 01 03 (035)

00 01 03 (035)
Abbreviations
All models
Introduction
BMW has a great many abbreviations: in Development, in Production, in Organisation, in Sales and Marketing, in Testing Schedules and in
Technical Vehicle Documentation.
BMW language: approximately 1,500 abbreviations in the technical area alone!

To support diagnosis, this SI Technology bulletin includes an abbreviation glossary.
Abbreviations can be like a secret language, especially for members of staff who are new to the trade or who have come from other areas of the
workshop, but also for other persons with an interest in engineering. Abbreviations can be simple "catchwords", with a clear meaning.
These abbreviation glossaries are intended as an aid in this process.
Abbreviation glossaries
The following abbreviations lists are available:

- Model series and models with illustrations
Model series from recent years with illustrations, sales designations, engines, etc.
- Engines since 1983
Engines and associated electronic engine control systems
- Transmissions since 1986
Transmissions and associated electronic transmission control systems
- Control units: Update 07/2007
Current control units in diagnosis and programming
- BMW Service Technology glossary:Update 07/2007
More than 700 abbreviations from the field of BMW Service Technology.
New in comparison to the 2004 abbreviations list:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 619
- Some abbreviations have been newly incorporated.
- Some abbreviations have been deleted. This is because: The volume of abbreviations should be kept as small as possible to make the
document as easy and comfortable as possible to read.
- Some of the texts in the "Usage" column have been revised.
For reasons associated with the system, the glossary is divided into the following enclosures:
- Introduction, abbreviations with numbers and characters
- -A-
- -B-
- -C-
- -D-
- -E-
- -F-
- -G-
- -H-
- -I-
- -J-
- -K-
- -L-
- -M-
- -N-
- -O-
- -P-
- -Q-
- -R-
- -S-
- -T-
- -U-
- -V-
- -W-
- -X-
- -Z-
- Overview of main groups
Note: This SI Technology bulletin is also available as a PDF file.

This SBT can be called up as a PDF file.
The SBT in PDF format is available in German and English.
The graphics in the PDF file are in colour.
Note: Thank you for your assistance and feedback

We wish to thank the staff from the Diagnostics department, the Programming department, the Integration department, the Repair Instructions
department and the Aftersales Training department for providing their lists and for their support in tallying the data.
Special thanks also go out to the Group Archive for providing pictures of early models and for the comprehensive, detailed proof-reading.
Subject to change.
Introduction
BMW Service Technology Glossary: Introduction, Numbers and Characters
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 620
Content of this Glossary
This glossary is an automatic export from the VS terminology database: http://termservice.muc
This terminology database contains agreed expressions that have been checked and approved as regards terminology and content from the
areas of diagnosis, repair instructions as well as technical vehicle documentation.
The following glossary contains almost 800 short forms from the field of
BMW Service Technology.
The short forms consist of:

- Abbreviations of words, e.g. "SMG" for sequential manual transmission
- Acronyms (acronyms are composed of the first letters of a number of words, e.g. "ADAC" for "Allgemeiner Deutscher Automobil-C
lub")
- Proper names (e.g. company names)
- Trade names
Note:
DWA, EDC etc. are in a separate directory.
For the sake of clarity, the abbreviations for control units have been exported into a separate glossary. e.g. DWA, EDC, etc.
These short forms are valid for both the system and the control unit.
Short form, long form, usage and main group
To enable better understanding, this glossary has been supplemented to include the following columns:
- "Usage": The text in this column indicates the context in which the expression is used.
- "KoGr": This column contains the main group of the acronym or long form.
An overview of the main groups can be found at the end.
See: Glossary/Main Groups
Note:
Texts in the column "Usage".
Most of the texts in the column "Usage" originate from texts that have already been published.
It would be desirable always to place a definition of the short form or long form under "Usage". However, it involves a great deal of
effort and costs to create or find definitions. This is why the existing texts have only been revised and supplemented to illustrate the
usage of the short form.
Note:
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 621
Expressions without main group.
Some short forms and expressions are not assigned to any particular main group.
In the case of these short forms, the column "KoGr" contains only "--".
Note:
Short form and long form
The terminology database http://termservice.muc contains a designation of the system or component in long form.
Example: Short form "LDR", long form "Photoresistor".
The origin of the short form is located in the column "Usage" (for this example:
LDR = "Light Dependent Resistor).
Reason: This glossary is an automatic export from the terminology database. The terminology database is structured for user
orientation in short form and meaning.
The origin of a short form is not quite as important as the meaning of the short form:
If there is a short form in a block diagram, the meaning is expected in the key
(i.e. the designation of the system or of the component in the relevant language).
Sorting of this Glossary
The glossary is alphabetically sorted.

Short forms with characters and numbers come first, followed by the short forms from A to Z.
Short Forms With Characters and Numbers
A
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 622
A - ACEA
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 623
ACK - AG
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 624
AGM - Al
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 625
AM - APS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 626
ARCNET - AUC
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 627
AUS - AZD
B
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 628
B - BMW AG
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 629
BMW Group - BSD
C
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 630
C - CARTOOL
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 631
CB - CD
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 632
CD ROM - CIFI
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 633
CIP - Cm3
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 634
CNG - CSS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 635
CVBS - CVT
D - DDK
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 636
DECT - DIN
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 637
DIS - DOB
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 638
DOHC - DOT 5.1

BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 639
DPF - DVB T
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 640
DVD - DWAH
E
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 641
E - ECE
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 642
ECO - EN
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 643
EO - ER
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 644
ESD - EuroNCAP
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 645
EUV - EVG
F - FAT
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 646
FB - FCKW
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 647
FDC - FFB
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 648
FGR - FM
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 649
FMVSS - FZV
G
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 650
G - GPS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 651
Gr - GWTZ
H
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 652
H - HC
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 653
HD - HIC
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 654
HiFi - HTTP
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 655
HUS - Hz
I
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 656
I - IFS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 657
IHKA - IR
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 658
IRZV - IT
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 659
ITS - IWZ
K
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 660
K - KByte
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 661
KDS - KSD
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 662
KSD-CD - KWP
L
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 663
L - LED
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 664
LEV - LIDAR
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 665
LIF - LS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 666
LSH - LWS
M
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 667
M - MAP
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 668
MAX - MFV
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 669
Mi - MID
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 670
MIG - MIPS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 671
MIR - MOZ
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 672
MPEG - MTK
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 673
MV - MW
N
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 674
N - NO
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 675
NO2 - NTSC
O
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 676
O - Ohc
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 677
OPPS - OZ
P
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 678
PA - PE
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 679
PG - Pos
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 680
PP - PUK
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 681
PuMA - PZEV
R
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 682
R - RGB
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 683
RHD - ROZ
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 684
RPA - RxD
S
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 685
S - SAV
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 686
SAZ - SDR
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 687
SDRAM - SGML
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 688
SGS - SOF
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 689
SP - SRS
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 690
SSG - SULEV
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 691
SUV - SZ
T
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 692
T - TD
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 693
Td - TLEV
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 694
TLF - TUV
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 695
TV - TxD
U
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 696
U - ULEV
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 697
URL - UVV
V
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 698
V - VG
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 699
VHF - Vt
W
BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) 700
W - WUP
WYSIWYG

BMW - M3 - V8-4.0 - E92 - Manual Part1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

BMW - M3 - V8-4.0 - E92 - Manual Part1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW - M3 - V8-4.0 - E92 - Manual Part1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 BMW M3 Coupe (E92) V8-4.0L (S65) Copyright © 2011, ALLDATA 10.

Vehicle Identification Number

VIN Location On Vehicle

The VIN is located on the vehicle in the following locations:

Vehicle Production Dates

Vehicle Production Anti-theft Labels

If equipped, the label is placed on the following locations:

Note: Assignment of abbreviated designation to model series

- E60 and E61

Alphanumerical overview of abbreviated designations

Abbreviated designations are alphabetically sorted in the following groups:

B - Sensors, electric converters

[Editing not yet complete ...]

[Editing not yet complete ...]

[Editing not yet complete ...]

Base of Tab Connector Housings

Special tools required:

Choose repair kit.

Remove following parts:

Open secondary lock on housing.

Refer to repair instructions:

Observe following procedure:

Refer also to repair instruction:

Crimp butt connector on preassembled wire end.

Refer to repair instructions:

Push shrink-fit hose (8) onto free wire end.

Crimp unused wire end to butt connector.

Pull shrink-on sleeve over butt connector.

Insert contact in housing.

Special tools required:

Crimping annular contacts:

Refer to Service Information:

Special tools required:

Open pliers (1).

Place MPQ contact (2) in crimping head (3).

Close pliers (1) one notch.

Insert stripped cable (2).

Close pliers (1) fully.

Open pliers (1) and remove cable (2).

Crimping Micro Quadlock System Contacts (MQS)

Special tools required:

Open pliers (1).

Fold up contact carrier (2).

Insert MQS contact (3) in contact carrier (2).

Fold back contact carrier (2).

Close pliers (1) one notch.

Insert stripped cable (2).

Close pliers (1) fully.

Open pliers (1).

Crimping Optical Fibres

Special tools required:

Open pliers (2).

Close pliers (3) fully.

Open pliers (3) and locking lever (4).

Remove optical fibre (1).

Crimping Stop Parts

Special tools required:

Spare parts for in-car electronics (housing and contacts):